OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching

System
V100R006

Configuration Guide

Issue 04
Date 2011-06-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: [Link]
Email: support@[Link]

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the configuration of different types of services on the OptiX OSN 9500,
with regard to the basic concepts, networking diagram, signal flow and timeslot allocation, and
configuration process.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 9500 V100R006

OptiX iManager T2000 V100R006C03: V200R008C00

iManager U2000 V100R006C05: V100R002C01

NOTE

This document is prepared based on the T2000. The operations on the U2000 are similar to those on the T2000.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

l Data configuration engineers

l System maintenance engineers
l Installation and commissioning engineers

Organization
This document is organized as follows.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
About This Document Configuration Guide

Topic Description

1 Starting the T2000 Describes the basic operations to quickly start of the T2000.

2 Creating the Network Describes how to create an NE, how to create boards, how
to create fibers and cables, how to configure the protection
subnet, and how to configure SDH services, and how to
configure the clock on the T2000.

3 Configuring SDH Services Describes how to configure SDH services on the T2000.

4 Configuring Ethernet Describes how to configure Ethernet services on the T2000.

Services

5 Configuring Broadcast Describes how to configure broadcast data services on the

Data Services T2000.

6 Configuring the F1 Data Describes how to configure F1 data services on the T2000.
Service

7 Modifying the Describes how to modify the configuration data on the

Configuration Data T2000.

8 Task Collection Describes the common operations required for configuring

various services on the T2000.

9 Equipment Information This chapter provides the requirements of board service

capacity and the configuration requirements for configuring
Ethernet services on the T2000.

A Glossary Lists the terms used in this document.

B Acronyms and Lists the acronyms used in this document.

Abbreviations

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if

not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided,

could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance
CAUTION
degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface.

For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier
New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical

bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be
selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical

bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
About This Document Configuration Guide

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are
in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.
For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the
two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the
pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly
without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer
to a certain position.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide About This Document

Updates in Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R006

This document is the fourthformal release of version V100R006. Compared with Issue 03, Issue
04 has the following changes:
l Section "Glossary" is optimized.

Updates in Issue 03 (2009-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006

This document is the second formal release of version V100R006. Compared with Issue 02,
Issue 03 has the following changes:
l The T2000 version is changed according to the product version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-04-20) Based on Product Version V100R006

This document is the second formal release of version V100R006. Compared with Issue 01,
Issue 02 has the following changes:
l The T2000 version is changed according to the product version.
l The known bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-03-20) Base on Product Version V100R006

This document is the first formal release of version V100R006. Compared with version
V100R005, version V100R006 has the following changes:
l The structures of the topics "Configuring SDH Services" and "Configuring Ethernet
Services" are adjusted.
l The topic "Starting the T2000" is added.
l The topic "Creating the Network" is added.
l The topic "Modifying the Configuration Data" is added.
l The topic "Task Collections" is added.
l The topic "Equipment Information" is added.
l The topic "Configuring the DCN" is deleted.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R005

The OptiX OSN 9500 provides two Ethernet data boards (namely, EGS8 and EAS1) that support
layer 2 switching in the V100R005 version. For this reason, this document focuses on chapter
2 "Configuring Ethernet Services." This chapter takes the service supported by the EGS8 board
as an example to describe the configuration method. This chapter also provides the following
sections:
l Configuring the EPL service for shared ports
l Configuring the EPL service for shared VCTRUNKs
l Configuring the EPLAN service
l Configuring the EVPLAN service
The service description involves the following information:
l Engineering requirements

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
About This Document Configuration Guide

l Engineering planning
l Configuration process (station by station)
l Creating a board
l Configuring Ethernet interfaces
l Configuring EPL services
l Configuring SDH services
l Configuring process (by trail)

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R004

This document of the V100R004 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 02, issue
03 has the following revised or optimized content.
This release of the document fixes several bugs in the document of previous version.

Updates in Issue02 (2007-02-10) Based on Product Version V100R004

This document of the V100R004 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue
02 has the following revised or optimized content.
This release of the document fixes several bugs in the document of previous version.

Updates in Issue01 (2006-08-10) Based on Product Version V100R004

The first commercial is of the first release.

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Starting the T2000.......................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000.............................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Starting the Computer............................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server...................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status.........................................................................................................1-4
1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client..............................................................................................................1-5
1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client...........................................................................................................................1-6
1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server...........................................................................................................1-6
1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer.................................................................................................................1-7
1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views...............................................................................................................1-8
1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology..................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer.......................................................................................................................1-8
1.2.3 Opening the Clock View........................................................................................................................1-9

2 Creating the Network................................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Creating NEs...................................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.1 Creating a Single NE..............................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.2 Creating NEs in Batches........................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.2 Configuring the NE Data.................................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.......................................................................................................2-6
2.2.2 Replicating the NE Data.........................................................................................................................2-8
2.2.3 Uploading the NE Data..........................................................................................................................2-9
2.3 Checking Board Parameters............................................................................................................................2-9
2.4 Creating Links...............................................................................................................................................2-12
2.4.1 Creating Fibers Automatically.............................................................................................................2-12
2.4.2 Creating Fibers for SDH Equipment Manually....................................................................................2-13
2.4.3 Creating Virtual Fibers.........................................................................................................................2-14
2.4.4 Creating DCN Communication Cable..................................................................................................2-15
2.5 Creating a Topology Subnet..........................................................................................................................2-15
2.6 Configuring the Equipment Level Protection...............................................................................................2-16
2.6.1 Creating a 1+1 Protection Group for Boards.......................................................................................2-17
2.6.2 Creating a LAG....................................................................................................................................2-18

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Contents Configuration Guide

2.6.3 Creating a DLAG.................................................................................................................................2-19

2.7 Configuring the Protection Subnet................................................................................................................2-20
2.7.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain...................................................................................................2-21
2.7.2 Configuring a Non-Protection Ring.....................................................................................................2-21
2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet..............................................................................................2-22
2.7.4 Creating a Linear MS Protection Subnet..............................................................................................2-25
2.8 Configuring Clocks.......................................................................................................................................2-27
2.8.1 Configuring the NE Clock Source.......................................................................................................2-27
2.8.2 Configuring the Clock Source Protection............................................................................................2-28
2.9 Configuring Orderwire..................................................................................................................................2-29
2.9.1 Configuring Orderwire.........................................................................................................................2-30
2.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls..............................................................................................................2-30
2.9.3 Configuring Express Orderwire...........................................................................................................2-31
2.9.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets.................................................................................................................2-33

3 Configuring SDH Services.......................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain........................................................................................3-5
3.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.....................................................................................................3-6
3.2.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................3-6
3.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring.........................................................................................3-8
3.3.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................3-9
3.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.....................................................................................................3-9
3.3.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-10
3.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services.........................................................................................................3-13
3.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-14
3.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................3-14
3.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-15
3.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services..........................................................................................................3-17
3.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-18
3.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................3-18
3.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-19
3.6 Configuring Two-Fiber Unidirectional MSP Services..................................................................................3-21
3.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-22
3.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................3-22
3.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-24
3.7 Configuring Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services....................................................................................3-29
3.7.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-29
3.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................3-30
3.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-30
3.8 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services....................................................................................3-34
3.8.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-34

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide Contents

3.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................3-35

3.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-36
3.9 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring........................................................................................................3-39
3.9.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-40
3.9.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................3-40
3.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................3-42
3.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring....................................................................................................3-46
3.10.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-46
3.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-47
3.10.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-48
3.11 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain.....................................................3-51
3.11.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-52
3.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-52
3.11.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-53
3.12 Configuring Services on the MSP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain.......................................................3-58
3.12.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-59
3.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-59
3.12.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-60
3.13 Configuring Services on the MSP Tangent Rings......................................................................................3-63
3.13.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-63
3.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-64
3.13.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-66
3.14 Configuring Services on the MSP Intersecting Rings.................................................................................3-70
3.14.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-70
3.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-71
3.14.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-72
3.15 Configuring Services on the SNCP Tangent Rings....................................................................................3-79
3.15.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-80
3.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-81
3.15.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-82
3.16 Configuring Services on the SNCP Intersecting Rings...............................................................................3-88
3.16.1 Networking Diagram..........................................................................................................................3-88
3.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.................................................................................................3-89
3.16.3 Configuration Process........................................................................................................................3-91

4 Configuring Ethernet Services................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Ethernet Service Types....................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.1 Formats of Ethernet Frames...................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.2 External Ports and Internal Ports..........................................................................................................4-11
4.2.3 Auto-Negotiation..................................................................................................................................4-11
4.2.4 Flow Control........................................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.5 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocol..................................................................................................4-13

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Contents Configuration Guide

4.2.6 Virtual Concatenation..........................................................................................................................4-14

4.2.7 Tag Attributes.......................................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.8 Bridge...................................................................................................................................................4-17
4.3 Flow of Configuring Ethernet Services.........................................................................................................4-21
4.3.1 Flow of Configuring EPL Services......................................................................................................4-21
4.3.2 Flow of Configuring EVPL Services...................................................................................................4-23
4.3.3 Flow of Configuring EPLAN Services................................................................................................4-26
4.3.4 Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services.............................................................................................4-29
4.4 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board...............................................4-33
4.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................4-33
4.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................4-34
4.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-36
4.5 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board........................................................................4-43
4.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................4-43
4.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................4-44
4.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-46
4.6 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services...................................................................................4-56
4.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................4-57
4.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................4-58
4.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-60
4.7 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services..........................................................................4-69
4.7.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................4-70
4.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................4-71
4.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-73
4.8 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services.............................................................................................................4-81
4.8.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................4-82
4.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................4-83
4.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-85
4.9 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)...................................................................................4-94
4.9.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................4-94
4.9.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...................................................................................................4-95
4.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................4-97
4.10 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)............................................................................4-107
4.10.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................4-108
4.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...............................................................................................4-109
4.10.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................4-112
4.11 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)..........................................................................4-125
4.11.1 Networking Diagram........................................................................................................................4-125
4.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation...............................................................................................4-127
4.11.3 Configuration Process......................................................................................................................4-129

5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services.....................................................................................5-1

5.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................5-2

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide Contents

5.2 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................5-3

5.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation..............................................................................................................5-4
5.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................5-5

6 Configuring the F1 Data Service.............................................................................................6-1

6.1 Basic Concepts................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................6-2
6.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation..............................................................................................................6-3
6.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................6-3

7 Modifying the Configuration Data.........................................................................................7-1

7.1 Modifying NE Attributes................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Modifying the NE ID.............................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Modifying the NE Name........................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 Deleting NEs..........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.4 Modifying GNE Parameters...................................................................................................................7-4
7.1.5 Changing the GNE for NEs....................................................................................................................7-5
7.2 Modifying the Board Configuration Data.......................................................................................................7-6
7.2.1 Adding Boards........................................................................................................................................7-6
7.2.2 Deleting Boards......................................................................................................................................7-7
7.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters..........................................................................................7-7
7.3 Modifying the Fiber Configuration Data........................................................................................................7-8
7.3.1 Modifying Fiber Cable Information.......................................................................................................7-8
7.3.2 Deleting Fibers.......................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.3 Deleting DCN Communication Cables..................................................................................................7-9
7.4 Modifying the Service Configuration Data.....................................................................................................7-9
7.4.1 Modifying SDH Services.....................................................................................................................7-10
7.4.2 Deleting SDH Services.........................................................................................................................7-11
7.4.3 Changing Mount Ports of a Bridge......................................................................................................7-12
7.4.4 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses...............................................................................7-12
7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet Private Line Services..............................................................................................7-13
7.4.6 Deleting EVPLAN Services.................................................................................................................7-13
7.4.7 Deleting EPLAN Services....................................................................................................................7-14
7.5 Modifying the Protection Subnet..................................................................................................................7-15
7.5.1 Deleting Protection Subnets.................................................................................................................7-15
7.5.2 Setting Protection Subnet Parameters..................................................................................................7-16

8 Task Collection...........................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Creating SDH Services....................................................................................................................................8-4
8.2 Creating SNCP Services..................................................................................................................................8-5
8.3 Configuring Trace Byte...................................................................................................................................8-6
8.4 Configuring C2 Byte.......................................................................................................................................8-7
8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE...................................................................................8-8
8.6 Checking the Configuration of SDH Services................................................................................................8-9

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Contents Configuration Guide

8.7 Configuring External Ports on Ethernet Boards............................................................................................8-12

8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Ethernet Boards.............................................................................................8-14
8.9 Configuring Bound Paths..............................................................................................................................8-16
8.10 Creating Ethernet Private Line Services and Ethernet Virtual Private Line Services.................................8-16
8.11 Creating EPLAN Services and EVPLAN Services.....................................................................................8-18
8.12 Creating VLANs Filtering...........................................................................................................................8-21
8.13 Creating VLAN Unicast..............................................................................................................................8-22
8.14 Disabling an MAC Address........................................................................................................................ 8-23
8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels............................................................................................................. 8-23
8.16 Adjusting Concatenated Timeslots..............................................................................................................8-25
8.17 Optimizing Higher Order Pass-Through.....................................................................................................8-26
8.18 Deleting the Lower Order Cross-Connect Protection Group......................................................................8-27
8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board........................................................................................ 8-27
8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card........................................................................ 8-28
8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card................................................................................8-28
8.22 Checking the Network Communication Status...........................................................................................8-29
8.23 Viewing the Clock Trace Search.................................................................................................................8-30

9 Equipment Information............................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Service Support Capability of Ethernet Boards..............................................................................................9-2
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards........................................................9-2
9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet Boards...................................................9-4

A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide Figures

Figures

Figure 3-1 Networking diagram of the non-protection chain...............................................................................3-6

Figure 3-2 Signal flow and timeslot allocation....................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-3 Networking diagram of the non-protection ring.................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-4 Signal flow and timeslot allocation..................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-5 Networking diagram of the 1+1 linear MSP services.......................................................................3-14
Figure 3-6 Signal flow and timeslot allocation..................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-7 Networking diagram of the 1:1 linear MSP services........................................................................3-18
Figure 3-8 Signal flow and timeslot allocation..................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-9 Networking diagram of the two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.......................................................3-22
Figure 3-10 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-11 Networking diagram of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.......................................................3-29
Figure 3-12 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-30
Figure 3-13 Networking diagram of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.......................................................3-34
Figure 3-14 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-36
Figure 3-15 Networking diagram of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.......................................................3-40
Figure 3-16 Signal flow and timeslot allocation in normal cases......................................................................3-41
Figure 3-17 Signal flow and timeslot allocation after the switching..................................................................3-42
Figure 3-18 Networking diagram of the SNCP ring..........................................................................................3-47
Figure 3-19 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-48
Figure 3-20 Networking diagram of the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain.............................................3-52
Figure 3-21 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-53
Figure 3-22 Networking diagram of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection chain..........3-59
Figure 3-23 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-60
Figure 3-24 Networking diagram of the MSP tangent ring................................................................................3-64
Figure 3-25 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-65
Figure 3-26 Networking diagram of the MSP intersecting rings.......................................................................3-71
Figure 3-27 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-72
Figure 3-28 Networking diagram of the SNCP tangent rings............................................................................3-80
Figure 3-29 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-81
Figure 3-30 Networking diagram of the SNCP intersecting rings.....................................................................3-89
Figure 3-31 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................3-91
Figure 4-1 EPL services.......................................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 PORT-shared EVPL services ............................................................................................................4-4

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Figures Configuration Guide

Figure 4-3 VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services ...................................................................................................4-4

Figure 4-4 EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) .............................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-5 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) ..........................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-6 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).........................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-7 Formats of Ethernet frames................................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-8 Positions of the TPID and TCI in the frame structure........................................................................4-9
Figure 4-9 TCI structure of the C-TAG............................................................................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-10 TCI structure of the S-TAG............................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-11 External ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards .....................................................................4-11
Figure 4-12 Structure of the PAUSE frame....................................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-13 VC3-Xv/VC4-Xv multiframe and sequence indicator ..................................................................4-16
Figure 4-14 Relation between the VBs, LPs, PORTs, and VCTRUNKs...........................................................4-18
Figure 4-15 Virtual bridge..................................................................................................................................4-18
Figure 4-16 Flow of configuring EPL services .................................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-17 Flow of configuring EVPL services ..............................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-18 Flow of configuring EPLAN services............................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-19 Flow of configuring EVPLAN services ........................................................................................ 4-30
Figure 4-20 Networking diagram of the EPL services.......................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-21 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet transparent transmission board).............................4-35
Figure 4-22 Networking diagram of the EPL services.......................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-23 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board) ................................................... 4-45
Figure 4-24 Networking diagram for configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services ..............................4-57
Figure 4-25 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................4-58
Figure 4-26 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services .....................4-70
Figure 4-27 Signal flow and timeslot allocation................................................................................................4-71
Figure 4-28 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services....................................................................... 4-83
Figure 4-29 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.............................................................................................4-84
Figure 4-30 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) ............................. 4-95
Figure 4-31 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation ...........................................................................................4-96
Figure 4-32 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) .........................4-108
Figure 4-33 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation .........................................................................................4-109
Figure 4-34 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) .......................4-126
Figure 4-35 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation .........................................................................................4-127
Figure 5-1 Overhead channel...............................................................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-2 Networking diagram of the broadcast data port ................................................................................5-4
Figure 6-1 Networking diagram of the F1 data service........................................................................................6-3
Figure 8-1 Test connection diagram ..................................................................................................................8-10
Figure 8-2 Attributes of external ports on the Ethernet boards that support the QinQ function........................8-13
Figure 8-3 Attributes of internal ports on the Ethernet boards that support the QinQ function.........................8-15
Figure 8-4 Connection for testing the Ethernet service channels ......................................................................8-24

xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide Tables

Tables

Table 2-1 SDH board parameters.......................................................................................................................2-10

Table 2-2 Data board parameters........................................................................................................................2-10
Table 4-1 Corresponding relations between the PORTs and VCTRUNKs (EPL services).................................4-3
Table 4-2 Corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs (PORT-shared EVPL services)
...............................................................................................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-3 Corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs (VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services)
...............................................................................................................................................................................4-5
Table 4-4 Tag types defined by using the TPID...................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-5 Processing mode of data frames at ports with different tags..............................................................4-16
Table 4-6 Virtual bridge.....................................................................................................................................4-19
Table 4-7 Types of bridges supported by the Ethernet boards...........................................................................4-19
Table 4-8 Flow of configuring EPL services .....................................................................................................4-22
Table 4-9 Flow of configuring EVPL services ..................................................................................................4-25
Table 4-10 Flow of configuring EPLAN services..............................................................................................4-27
Table 4-11 Flow of configuring EVPLAN services ..........................................................................................4-31
Table 4-12 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-35
Table 4-13 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-35
Table 4-14 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-45
Table 4-15 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-45
Table 4-16 Parameters of the EPL services........................................................................................................4-46
Table 4-17 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-59
Table 4-18 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-59
Table 4-19 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services...............................................................4-59
Table 4-20 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-71
Table 4-21 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-72
Table 4-22 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services......................................................4-72
Table 4-23 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-84
Table 4-24 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-84
Table 4-25 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) services........................................................................................4-85
Table 4-26 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-96
Table 4-27 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards...................................................................4-96
Table 4-28 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)...........................................................4-97
Table 4-29 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards.................................................................4-110
Table 4-30 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards.................................................................4-110

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Tables Configuration Guide

Table 4-31 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).........................................................4-111

Table 4-32 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards.................................................................4-128
Table 4-33 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards.................................................................4-128
Table 4-34 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).......................................................4-129
Table 5-1 Pin assignment of the broadcast data port............................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 NE parameters......................................................................................................................................5-5
Table 6-1 Pin assignment of the F1 data port.......................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 NE parameters of the F1 data service...................................................................................................6-3
Table 9-1 Service support capability of Ethernet boards......................................................................................9-2
Table 9-2 Requirements for binding paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet boards..............................................9-2

xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

1 Starting the T2000

About This Chapter

The following pages introduces some preparation operations that will ensure a smooth, trouble-
free launch of the T2000.

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000

The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.
1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views
In the common views of the T2000, you can manage the topology, equipment, protection subnet,
trail and clock.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

1.1 Starting or Shutting Down the T2000

The T2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. So, you are
recommended to start or shut down the T2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users that are operating the T2000.

Background Information
l Start the computer and the T2000 application in the following steps:
1. Start the computer.
2. Start the T2000 server.
3. Start the T2000 client.
l Shut down the T2000 application and the computer in the following steps:
1. Exit the T2000 client.
2. Stop the T2000 server.
3. Shut down the computer.
1.1.1 Starting the Computer
To avoid computer damage or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the computer.
The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the
correct procedure to perform the operations as required.
1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server
After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to the
T2000 to manage the network.
1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status
When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the
System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.
1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client
You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the
T2000 client.
1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client
Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the
T2000 client.
1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server
When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In
special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the
T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor to shut down
the T2000 server.
1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer
Normally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computer
becomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures of
the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform
the operations as required.

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

1.1.1 Starting the Computer

To avoid computer damage or data loss, refer to the procedure provided to start the computer.
The startup procedures of the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the
correct procedure to perform the operations as required.

Prerequisite
l The T2000 must be installed correctly.
l The power cable of the workstation or the computer, the power cable of the monitor, data
line and Ethernet line must be connected correctly.
l If there is printer, modem or other peripherals, their power line and data line must be
connected correctly.

Background Information
The T2000 can run in the UNIX or Windows operating systems. The functions are the same in
each operating system. To learn about the recommended hardware configuration, refer to the
OptiX iManager T2000 Product Description.

Procedure
l On UNIX
1. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals.
2. Power on the workstation and the Solaris is automatically started. The Prompt dialog
box is displayed.
3. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:
t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default).
4. Click OK to open the Common Desktop Environment (CDE) window.
l On Windows
1. Power on the printer, modem and other peripherals.
2. Power on the computer and the Windows is automatically started.
3. Enter the Username and the Password in the Login dialog box. For example, User:
t2000 (by default); Password: t2000 (by default).
4. Click OK to open the Windows user interface.
----End

1.1.2 Starting the T2000 Server

After starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to the
T2000 to manage the network.

Prerequisite
l The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly.
l The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly.
l The T2000 license must be in the correct directory. If the T2000 server is installed on UNIX,
copy the license to the directory /T2000/server/license/. If the T2000 server is installed on
Windows, copy the license to the directory \T2000\server\license\.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

l On UNIX, the Sybase must be started and work normally. On Windows, the SQL Server
must be started and work normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server.
Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter User Name, Password and Server. For example, User Name:
admin, Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user.) and Server:
Local.
NOTE

Periodically change the password and memorize it.

If the System Monitor logs in to the server that is installed on another computer, you need to set the server
to be logged in to in advance. The settings are similar to the settings of the server that a client logs in to
remotely. For details, see Set the server parameters.

Step 3 Click Login. Wait until the database process, T2000 core process, and the processes that are
optional according to the actual situation are in the Running state. Now the T2000 server is
started successfully.
Step 4 Optional: When needed, right-click on the process, and choose Start Process from the shortcut
menu to start the Extended NE Management Process, NGWDM NE Management Process,
RTN NE Management Process, SDH NE Management Process, WDM NE Management
Process, ASON SDH Management Process, ASON WDM Management Process, End-to-
End Common Management Process, End-to-End Eth Management Process, End-to-End
OTN Management Process, End-to-End SDH Management Process, and Northbound
Interface Module(SNMP) Process processes manually.
NOTE

If the System Monitor application is started, you can restart the T2000 server on the System Monitor.
Perform the following step:
Choose System > Start Server on the Main Menu of the System Monitor. Wait until the database process,
T2000 core process, and the processes that are optional according to the actual situation are in the
Running state, the T2000 server is started properly.

----End

1.1.3 Viewing the T2000 Process Status

When you fail to log in to the T2000 client or abnormally exit the T2000 client, you can use the
System Monitor to view the T2000 process status to decide whether the server is faulty.

Background Information
To view the status of the T2000 processes by UNIX command line, run the following command:
# /T2000/server/bin/showt2000server
If each process entered has a corresponding process ID and the specific ID does not change, the
T2000 processes are normal.

Procedure
Step 1 Start and log in to the System Monitor.
Step 2 In the user interface of the System Monitor, click the Process tab, and view whether the status
of each process is Running.

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

l If the process status is Stopped, right-click on the process, and choose Start Process from
the shortcut menu. In this manner, the process is in the Running state.
l If the manual startup fails, it indicates that the process is abnormal.
l To save resources, you can close unwanted processes. Set the startup mode of the desired
process to Manual, and then select Stop Process.

----End

1.1.4 Logging In to the T2000 Client

You can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to the
T2000 client.

Prerequisite
The T2000 server must be started correctly.

Background Information
When the T2000 server and the T2000 client are not on a computer, you need to install the client
on the computer where the server resides. Set ACL on the client and then issue the ACL setting
to the server.
l On the T2000 client, choose System > NMS Security Settings > ACL from the Main
Menu.
l Click Add. In the dialog box displayed, enter related information.
– Select IP Address or Segment and set an IP address or network section that can be
accessed according to the Example of format.
– Select Start IP address to end IP address and set the rang of IP addresses that can be
accessed according to the Example of format.

Procedure
Step 1 On the computer of the T2000 client, double-click the T2000Client icon on the desktop.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password of the T2000 client. For example, User Name: admin;
Password: T2000.
NOTE

l After the automatic login is selected, you do not need to enter the user name and password.
l By default, the initial user name is admin, and the password is T2000. To protect the T2000 from
unauthorized logins, you need to immediately change this password.
l The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups.

Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters.

1. Click to display the Server Setting dialog box.

2. Click New to display another Add Server dialog box.
3. In the Add Server dialog box, specify the IP Address, Mode and Server Name.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

NOTE

l The IP Address is the IP address used by the T2000 server.

l The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). When you choose the
Security (SSL) mode, the communication between the client and the server is encrypted.
l The communication mode of the client must be consistent with that of the server. Otherwise, the
client cannot log in to the server. To view the communication mode of the server, choose
System > Communication Mode Settings on the Main Menu of the System Monitor.
l You need not enter the Port number. After the Mode is specified, the system selects a Port
number automatically.
4. Click OK to complete adding a server.
5. Click OK to complete the server settings.
Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000.

----End

1.1.5 Exiting a T2000 Client

Before restarting the T2000 client or shutting down the T2000 server, you must exit the
T2000 client.

Prerequisite
The T2000 client must be started normally.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.
NOTE

If the layout of the view is changed and not saved, the Save Coordinates dialog box is displayed. Make a
selection and then exit the client automatically.

----End

1.1.6 Shutting Down the T2000 Server

When the T2000 server is managing the system normally, do not perform this operation. In
special circumstances, for example, when modifying the system time of the computer where the
T2000 resides, or when upgrading the version, you can use the System Monitor to shut down
the T2000 server.

Prerequisite
All the T2000 clients connected to the T2000 server must be shut down.

Background Information
When performing the operations related to the database (such as initializing the T2000
database, restoring T2000 databases and restoring T2000 MO data) or the operations related to
the T2000 (such as the upgrade, installing patches and re-installing the T2000), you need to shut
down the T2000 server first. You are recommended to shut down the T2000 server in the way
of "shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor".

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

Procedure
l Shut down the T2000 server only.
NOTE

In this case, the MDP process is not shut down and the database cannot be initialized.
1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Stop Server from the Main Menu.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. When all the processes are in the
Stopped status, the T2000 server is stopped normally.
l Shut down the T2000 server and the System Monitor.
NOTE

After all the T2000 processes are finished, you can initialize the database.
1. In the System Monitor, choose System > Shutdown System from the Main Menu.

----End

1.1.7 Shutting Down the Computer

Normally, do not shut down the computer. In special situations, for example, when the computer
becomes faulty, shut down the computer in the correct sequence. The shutdown procedures of
the workstation are different from those of a normal PC. Follow the correct procedure to perform
the operations as required.

Prerequisite
The T2000 server and client applications must be stopped.

Precaution

CAUTION
To avoid equipment damages or data loss, perform the following step one by one to shut down
the workstation.

Procedure
l On UNIX platform
1. Enter the following commands in the terminal window, the UNIX workstation shuts
down automatically:
% su root
Password: rootkit
# sync;sync;sync;sync;sync
# shutdown -y -g0 -i5

NOTE

l rootkit is the default password of super user root. If the password is changed, enter the
new password.
l To restart the Sun workstation, the last command is # shutdown -y -g0 -i6.
2. Turn off the peripheral equipment.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
1 Starting the T2000 Configuration Guide

l On Windows platform
1. Choose Start > Shut down from the Windows desktop.
2. Choose Shut down and click OK in the dialog box. The computer shuts down
automatically.
3. Turn off the monitor and the peripheral equipment.
----End

1.2 Entering the T2000 Common Views

In the common views of the T2000, you can manage the topology, equipment, protection subnet,
trail and clock.

1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology

On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.
1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer
The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening
the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a
hierarchical manner.
1.2.3 Opening the Clock View
After opening the Clock View, you can set an NE clock, query a network clock synchronization
status, or trace a clock.

1.2.1 Opening the Main Topology

On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
l To open the Main Topology, log in to the T2000 client.
l Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.
----End

1.2.2 Opening the NE Explorer

The NE Explorer is the key interface for the T2000 to configure a single station. After opening
the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a
hierarchical manner.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Background Information
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 1 Starting the T2000

Procedure
l Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
----End

1.2.3 Opening the Clock View

After opening the Clock View, you can set an NE clock, query a network clock synchronization
status, or trace a clock.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Clock View from the Main Menu.

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

2 Creating the Network

About This Chapter

NEs and fibers or cables can be managed on the T2000 only after their topologies are created.
2.1 Creating NEs
Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actual
equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two ways of
creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large
number of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs in
batches. When you need to create just a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEs
one by one.
2.2 Configuring the NE Data
Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.
2.3 Checking Board Parameters
To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual
configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure that
the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking.
2.4 Creating Links
You can create fibers, Ethernet cables, serial port cables, extended ECC and virtual fibers by
using the T2000.
2.5 Creating a Topology Subnet
The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the case
of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate them
in one topology subnet.
2.6 Configuring the Equipment Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 9500 equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes,
including the 1+1 board protection, board level protection, and port protection.
2.7 Configuring the Protection Subnet
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports various network level protection schemes, including the linear
MSP and ring MSP.
2.8 Configuring Clocks

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

A clock is the basis for the normal running of NEs. You must configure clocks for all NEs prior
to configuring services. In addition, you need to configure clock protection for complex
networks.
2.9 Configuring Orderwire
You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the T2000.

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

2.1 Creating NEs

Each equipment is represented as an NE on the T2000. Before the T2000 manages the actual
equipment, you need to create the corresponding NEs on the T2000. There are two ways of
creating NEs: creating a single NE and creating NEs in batches. When you need to create a large
number of NEs, for example, during deployment, it is recommended that you create NEs in
batches. When you need to create just a few NEs, it is recommended that you create the NEs
one by one.

2.1.1 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the T2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single
NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of
whether the data is configured on the NE or not.
2.1.2 Creating NEs in Batches
When the T2000 communicates properly with the GNE, you can create NEs in batches by
searching for all NEs that communicate with the GNE, by using the IP address of the GNE or
the network segment to which the IP address is associated, or by using the NSAP address of the
NE. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.

2.1.1 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the T2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single
NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of
whether the data is configured on the NE or not.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.
l The license must be installed and the license must support creating the NE of the type.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Background Information
First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.

For easy management, create optical NEs before creating NEs in batches. Otherwise, new NEs
are allocated to idle optical NEs automatically.

If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the T2000 is
abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Device from the shortcut
menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Select the NE type from the Object Type tree.

Step 3 Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Step 4 To create a GNE, proceed to Step 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to Step 6.
Step 5 Choose Gateway Type, Protocol and set the IP address and NSAP address.
1. Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list.
2. Select the Protocol type.
If the T2000 Do...
communicates with
NEs through

IP protocol Select IP from the Protocol drop-down list. Enter the IP

Address and use the default value for the Port number of
the GNE.

OSI protocol Select OSI from the Protocol drop-down list. Enter the
NSAP Address of the GNE.

NOTE

The NSAP address is a hexadecimal number that contains a maximum of 20 bytes. Its format is:
domain address+08003e+NE ID+NSEL.
The domain address that contains a maximum of 13 bytes is entered by the user. NSEL is the port
number of the network-level protocol, with a fixed value of 1d (one byte).

Step 6 Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which the NE
is associated to from the Affiliated Gateway drop-down list.
Step 7 Enter the NE User and Password.
NOTE
The default NE user is root, and the default password is password.

Step 8 Optional: If you do not want to apply the NE configuration data in the T2000 to the NE, check
the NE Preconfiguration check box, and set NE Software Version.
NOTE
If you apply the configuration data of the preconfigured NE to the actual NE when the configuration data
on the preconfigured NE is inconsistent with that on the actual NE, the actual services will be affected.

Step 9 Click OK. Click in the blank space of the Main Topology and the NE icon appears in the position
where you clicked.

----End

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as the
IP address, NSAP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the T2000 database.

Follow-up Procedure
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The communication between the T2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of
communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.
l The NE user is already logged in. In this case, change to use a valid NE user.

2.1.2 Creating NEs in Batches

When the T2000 communicates properly with the GNE, you can create NEs in batches by
searching for all NEs that communicate with the GNE, by using the IP address of the GNE or
the network segment to which the IP address is associated, or by using the NSAP address of the
NE. This method is quicker and more accurate than manual creation.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.
l The T2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Search for NE from the Main Menu. The Search for NE window is displayed.
Step 2 Click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set Address type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE or NSAP Address, and
enter the information of the search address. Click OK.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

NOTE
You can repeat Steps 2 through 3 to add more search fields. You can delete the system default search field.
l If you use IP address to search for NEs, and the IP address of the T2000 computer and that of the GNE
are within the same network segment, you can select IP Address Range of GNE or IP Address of
GNE.
l If the IP addresses are not within the same network segment, select only IP Address of GNE.
l If you use NSAP address, you can only select NSAP address.

Step 4 Click Start. The NEs found are displayed after the search.
Step 5 When the search ends or if you click Stop, select the uncreated NEs in the Result list and click
Create. The Create dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Enter the NE user name and password.
NOTE

l The default NE user is root.

l The default password is password.

Step 7 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The communication between the T2000 and the NE is abnormal. In this case, check whether
the parameters such as the IP address or ID of the NE are set correctly.
l The NE user is already logged in. In this case, change to use a valid NE user.

2.2 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the T2000 can manage and operate the NE.

2.2.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.
2.2.2 Replicating the NE Data
During the network planning, virtue NEs are used to simulate the entire network. In this situation,
you need to configure a lot of identical NE data. The function of duplicating the NE configuration
data can simplify your operation and improve the efficiency.
2.2.3 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly.

2.2.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

The NE must be created successfully.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE whose data you want to configure.

If the NE to be configured is the You need

SDH equipment Double-click the unconfigured NE on the

Main Topology. The NE Configuration
Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating
that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.

Step 3 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that manual configuration interrupts
the service on the NE.

Step 4 Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Set NE Name, Equipment Type, NE Remarks and Subrack Type and then click Next. The
NE slot window is displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.

Step 7 Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.
NOTE
The Query Logical Information and Query Physical Information operations cannot be performed for
a preconfigured NE.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Step 8 Right-click on the slot to add a board. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.

Step 9 Choose Verify and Run as required and click Finish.

NOTE
Verification is to run the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to NEs and the
basic configuration of the NEs is complete. After the successful verification, the NEs start to work normally.

----End

2.2.2 Replicating the NE Data

During the network planning, virtue NEs are used to simulate the entire network. In this situation,
you need to configure a lot of identical NE data. The function of duplicating the NE configuration
data can simplify your operation and improve the efficiency.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

The NE type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with those of the
copied NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE whose data you want to Replicate.

If the NE to be configured is the You need

SDH equipment Double-click the unconfigured NE on the

Main Topology. The NE Configuration
Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the source NE from the drop-down list. Click Start. Then, the Confirm dialog box is
displayed, prompting Copying NE data will overwrite all the data of the selected NE.

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

NOTE

After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the T2000 side is changed, but the data on the equipment
side is not changed.

Step 4 Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the replication operation results
in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied.

Step 5 Click OK to start the replication. Wait for a few seconds. The Operation Result dialog box is
displayed.

Step 6 Click Close.

----End

2.2.3 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE whose data you want to Replicate.

If the NE to be configured is the You need

SDH equipment Double-click the unconfigured NE on the

Main Topology. The NE Configuration
Wizard dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Upload and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed indicating that the upload
may take a long time.

Step 3 Click OK to start the upload. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed when the uploading
is completed.

Step 4 Click Close.

----End

2.3 Checking Board Parameters

To learn about board parameter status, you can check board parameters. Before actual
configuration operations in networking, you need to check board parameters, to make sure that
the board parameter status meets the requirements of actual networking.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding navigation path and check the related board parameters.
1. Check SDH board parameters. For the SDH board parameters, see Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 SDH board parameters

Boar
Paramet Navigation
d Application Scenario
er Path
Type

Port This parameter specifies the position of the

port.

Optical a. In the NE This parameter specifies the name of the

Interface Explorer, optical interface.
Name select a board.
b. Choose
Laster When you configure services on the optical
Configuratio
Switch port of the board, set this parameter to enabled.
n > SDH
Optical Interface l Non-loopback: It is a normal state. When
(Electrical from the the equipment runs normally, set this
SDH ) Interface Function parameter to non-loopback.
Loopback Tree.
l Inloop: This value indicates that the
c. Click By loopback is performed towards the local
Board/Port NE.
(channel)
and select l Outloop: This value indicates that the
Port from the loopback is performed towards the NE on
drop-down the opposite end. Both inloop and outloop
list. on optical interfaces affect the services.
Hence, this parameter is set to Inloop or
Outloop only when required to locate a
fault.

2. Check data board parameters. For the data board parameters, see Table 2-2.

Table 2-2 Data board parameters

Boar
Parame
d Navigation Path Application Scenario
ter
Type

Enabled/ a. In the NE Explorer, When configuring Ethernet board port

Disabled select a board. services, set the port to Enabled.
b. Choose
Working Set the working mode of Ethernet ports
Ethern Configuration >
Mode according to networking configuration
et Ethernet Interface
requirements.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from the
Function Tree.

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

Boar
Parame
d Navigation Path Application Scenario
ter
Type

Maximu c. Click External When a packet exceeds the maximum

m Frame Port or Internal frame length that is set, the packet is
Length Port. discarded. Alternatively, the packet
d. Click the Basic length is minimized to satisfy the
Attributes tab. specified frame length. By default, the
value is set to 1522, unless otherwise
specified.

MAC l Non-loopback: It is a normal state.

Loopbac When the equipment runs normally,
k set this parameter to non-loopback.
l Inloop: Inside the equipment,
services from the cross-connect side
are looped back to the cross-connect
side. This operation affects services
configured on ports and is used to
locate faults.

PHY l Non-loopback: It is a normal state.

Loopbac When the equipment runs normally,
k set this parameter to non-loopback.
l Inloop: Inside the equipment,
services from the cross-connect side
are looped back to the cross-connect
side. This operation affects services
configured on ports and is used to
locate faults.

TAG l Tag Aware: If the client-side

a. In the NE Explorer, equipment sends tag packets, set the
select a board. TAG attribute of external ports to
b. Choose Tag Aware.
Configuration > l Access: If the client-side equipment
Ethernet Interface sends untagged packets, set the TAG
Management > attribute of external ports to Access.
Ethernet
Interface from the l Hybrid: If the client-side equipment
Function Tree. sends tag and untagged packets, set
the TAG attribute of external ports to
c. Select External Hybrid.
Port or Internal
Entry Port. This parameter is used to identify tags in
Detectio d. Click the TAG data packets. During the configuration of
n Attributes tab. VLAN services, set this parameter to
Enabled.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-11

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Step 2 Modify board parameters according to service planning and actual board configurations. For
details, see 7.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters.

----End

2.4 Creating Links

You can create fibers, Ethernet cables, serial port cables, extended ECC and virtual fibers by
using the T2000.

2.4.1 Creating Fibers Automatically

By using the fiber search feature, you can check whether the specified optical interface is
connected to a fiber. You can quickly create a fiber for this optical interface by using the T2000.
For a newly created network, after configuring boards on the T2000, you can search for all optical
interfaces to create fibers for the entire network. In this way, you can monitor the actual working
status of fibers.
2.4.2 Creating Fibers for SDH Equipment Manually
NEs communicate with each other through fibers. After creating boards for each NE, you need
to create fibers for further configuration of services. In this situation, you can manually create
fibers one by one.
2.4.3 Creating Virtual Fibers
When the T2000 manages the SDH, PTN and WDM equipment at the same time, you can create
virtual fibers for SDH or PTN equipment with WDM equipment in between, to facilitate
administration.
2.4.4 Creating DCN Communication Cable
The T2000 can communicate with NEs through the Ethernet port or serial port. The NEs also
communicate with each other through the extended ECC. Depending on the communication
mode, different types of cables can be created on the T2000.

2.4.1 Creating Fibers Automatically

By using the fiber search feature, you can check whether the specified optical interface is
connected to a fiber. You can quickly create a fiber for this optical interface by using the T2000.
For a newly created network, after configuring boards on the T2000, you can search for all optical
interfaces to create fibers for the entire network. In this way, you can monitor the actual working
status of fibers.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l The optical interfaces of every NE must be connected using fibers.
l The boards of every NE must be created on the T2000.

Background Information
l If conflicting fibers are found during the creation, delete the conflicting fibers on the T2000
before you start creating fibers.
l When a fiber between two SDH NEs passes through a WDM NE, if the normal fiber
between an SDH NE and a WDM NE has been created on the T2000, the fiber found by

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

the trail search function is created as a virtual fiber. If the WDM NE is not created on the
T2000, the fiber is created as a normal fiber.
l When a fiber is created, it is usually bidirectional. But when the fiber is connected to the
SDH and WDM equipment, the fiber is unidirectional.

Precautions
Searching fibers may result in service interruption.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Search for Fiber/Cable from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the left pane select some ports from one or more NEs and click Search to search for the fibers
or cables. A progress bar is displayed showing the progress of the search.
NOTE

l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box, the system only
searches for the ports that do not have fibers.
l To check if the created fiber is consistent with the actual fiber connection, leave the check box
unchecked.
l If you check the Do not search for ports of created fibers on T2000 check box, and if all the selected
ports have fibers created, the system displays a message indicating that the search field is null.

Step 3 A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

Step 4 To create fibers, select one or more fibers from the Newly Searched Fiber list and click Create
Fiber/Cable.
NOTE

l When one or more fibers are selected in the Newly Searched Fiber list, fibers that conflict with the
selected fibers, are shown in the Existing Conflicting Fiber list. If there is any conflicting fiber,
proceed to Step 5 and delete it before creating fibers.
l During fiber creation, if all the selected fibers are in an Already created state, the system displays the
message - No fiber to create.

Step 5 To delete the conflicting fibers, from the Existing Conflicting Fiber list select one or more
fibers whose values are Yes for the Existing Conflicting link (Y/N) parameter in the
Misconnected Fiber list. Click Delete Fiber/Cable.

----End

2.4.2 Creating Fibers for SDH Equipment Manually

NEs communicate with each other through fibers. After creating boards for each NE, you need
to create fibers for further configuration of services. In this situation, you can manually create
fibers one by one.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l The boards to be connected with fibers or cables must be created.
l The dynamic port must be created.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-13

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Precautions
When a fiber is created, it is usually bidirectional. But when the fiber is connected to the SDH
and WDM equipment, the fiber is unidirectional.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > Link. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.

Step 2 Choose Link > Fiber/Cable from the left pane.

Step 3 Click the button in Source NE. Select the source board and port in the Select the source end
of the link dialog box.

Step 4 Click OK and the cursor changes to a + sign.

Step 5 Click the sink NE of the fiber or cable on the Main Topology.

Step 6 Click the button in Sink NE. Select the sink board and port in the Select the sink end of the
link dialog box.
TIP
When selecting a wrong source or sink NE, right-click and click OK in the Object Selection dialog box
to exit.

Step 7 Click OK. Enter the information of the fiber or cable in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box.

Step 8 Click OK. The created fiber or cable appears between the source and sink NEs on the Main
Topology.

Step 9 Select the fiber you create, right-click and choose Detect Link from the shortcut menu.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating the fiber connection information.

----End

2.4.3 Creating Virtual Fibers

When the T2000 manages the SDH, PTN and WDM equipment at the same time, you can create
virtual fibers for SDH or PTN equipment with WDM equipment in between, to facilitate
administration.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l You must create fiber connections according to the true fibers that connect the SDH and
WDM equipment.

Background Information
l For SDH equipment, the virtual fibers ensure the independence of automatic fiber search
and SDH trail management. .
l For WDM equipment, when true fibers change into virtual fibers at the bearer layer,
wavelength management is not affected even if the true fibers are deleted
l The source and sink ports of the virtual fibers must be the SDH ports. On the source and
sink ports, there must be two physical fibers that are connected to the WDM equipment.

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

l The virtual fiber does not support the expansion function.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology, and choose New > Link from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 In the Add Object dialog box, choose Link > Virtual Fiber/Cable.

Step 3 Set the attributes of the fiber or cable in the right-hand list.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

2.4.4 Creating DCN Communication Cable

The T2000 can communicate with NEs through the Ethernet port or serial port. The NEs also
communicate with each other through the extended ECC. Depending on the communication
mode, different types of cables can be created on the T2000.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Link from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Select a cable type in the left-hand pane of the Add Object dialog box that is displayed.

Step 3 Enter the cable attributes in the right-hand pane.

Step 4 Click OK. The cable is displayed on the Main Topology between the T2000 and the GNE.

----End

2.5 Creating a Topology Subnet

The subnet created here is based on a topological concept to facilitate management. In the case
of topology objects in the same network area or with similar attributes, you can allocate them
in one topology subnet.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
A topology subnet is created only to simplify the user interface and has no impact on the NEs.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-15

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > Subnet from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Click the Properties tab in the Add Object dialog box. Enter the attributes of the subnet.

Step 3 Click the Select Objects tab. Select the created NEs or subnet from the Available Objects pane.
Click .

NOTE

In the case of a similar dialog box for selecting objects,

l indicates that to select the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right.
l indicates that to select all the objects to be selected on the left to the selected objects on the right.

Step 4 Click OK. Click in the blank space of the Main Topology, the icon appears in the position
where you clicked.

----End

2.6 Configuring the Equipment Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 9500 equipment supports various equipment level protection schemes,
including the 1+1 board protection, board level protection, and port protection.
2.6.1 Creating a 1+1 Protection Group for Boards
You can create 1+1 protection for cross-connect boards, clock boards, SCC boards or data
boards. When the working board fails, the services are automatically switched to the protection
board.
2.6.2 Creating a LAG
Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service
loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to
each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

2.6.3 Creating a DLAG

You need to set the main/slave relationship and revertive mode for the corresponding ports on
two boards of the same type. After the setting, 1+1 protection is configured for the ports.

2.6.1 Creating a 1+1 Protection Group for Boards

You can create 1+1 protection for cross-connect boards, clock boards, SCC boards or data
boards. When the working board fails, the services are automatically switched to the protection
board.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l A pair of cross-connect, clock, SCC or data boards must be installed.
l To create the lower order cross-connect protection pair, the GXCL or EXCL board that
supports lower order cross-connection must be installed in the OSN 9500.

Background Information
The cross-connect protection pair and the SCC protection pair can be automatically configured.
For the configuration of the 1+1 protection on other boards, see the following configuration
procedures:

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query the current working and protection status from the NE.
Step 3 Click New. In the Add Protection Group dialog box, set the Protection Group Type, Working
Board and Protection Board.

NOTE

If you select the working board, the protection board is automatically displayed.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-17

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

2.6.2 Creating a LAG

Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service
loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to
each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.

Prerequisite
l The physical network topology must be established.
l The NEs, fibers, Ethernet data boards, and other boards must be created on the T2000.
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree. Click the
Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.

Step 3 Click OK. Then, the Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Step 4 Optional: Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Set Port Priority and System
Priority.

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

NOTE

l The port ID consists of Port and Port Priority. The port that has the smallest port ID in a LAG has
the priority to be aggregated first.
l The system ID consists of System Priority and System MAC Address. When the system negotiates
with the remote system, the system with the smallest ID has the priority to choose the port. In this
example, the system refers to the board, and the system MAC address refers to the MAC address of
the board. The factory-set MAC address is globally unique and cannot be modified.

----End

2.6.3 Creating a DLAG

You need to set the main/slave relationship and revertive mode for the corresponding ports on
two boards of the same type. After the setting, 1+1 protection is configured for the ports.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
The restrictions on the application of the DLAG function are as follows:
l The equipment configured with a DLAG must be interconnected with the equipment that
runs the LACP protocol. If an intermediate node exists between two pieces of equipment
configured with DLAGs, the intermediate node must support the transparent transmission
of the protocol packets.
l The main/slave relationship exists only between two identical boards. The port on the slave
board is used only to protect the corresponding port on the main board.
l One DLAG can have a maximum of two ports. The two ports must have the same port
number.
l The slave board must not be configured with services (including Ethernet services, LAG,
cross-connections, LPT, VCTRUNK-bound paths).
l The bandwidth of the slot where the slave board is installed must be higher than or equal
to the bandwidth of the slot where the main board is installed.
l The BPS, PPS, and DLAG protection cannot be supported simultaneously on one Ethernet
data board.
l The port configured with a DLAG must be an external physical Ethernet port. One port
cannot be configured into a DLAG and a LAG at the same time.
l During the configuration of a DLAG, the attributes of the slave port automatically become
consistent with the attributes of the main port.
l Do not perform a selfloop on an external physical port that needs to be configured with a
DLAG.
l If Ethernet services are created, make sure that the bound level of the channel timeslot is
consistent with the level of the configured cross-connection service.
l If Ethernet services are created, make sure that the external physical port that needs to be
configured with a DLAG does not share the same VCTRUNK port with other external
physical ports.
l One external physical port of a DLAG can correspond to multiple VCTRUNKs. One
VCTRUNK, however, can correspond to only one external physical port of a DLAG. The
external physical ports of different DLAGs cannot be configured into one virtual bridge

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-19

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

(VB). This is because one VCTRUNK may correspond to multiple external physical ports
if the external physical ports of different DLAGs are configured into one VB.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link
Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New, and the Create Distributed Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the attributes and ports of the DLAG.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Create a DLAG on the interconnected NE on the opposite end.

----End

2.7 Configuring the Protection Subnet

The OptiX OSN 9500 supports various network level protection schemes, including the linear
MSP and ring MSP.
2.7.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain
If a service in the chain does not need to be protected, you can configure a non-protection chain.
In this case, all the timeslots in the chain can be used to transmit the service.
2.7.2 Configuring a Non-Protection Ring
When services on a ring do not need protection, you can configure a non-protection (NP) ring.
All timeslots on the ring can be used to transmit services.
2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

The MS ring protection scheme is adopted in a common ring network. Normally, it is adopted
to protect a channel to transmit additional services. By running the APS protocol, it achieves the
MS level protection.
2.7.4 Creating a Linear MS Protection Subnet
In a chain network, an NE can protect a service in different sections of the fiber after a linear
MS protection subnet is created.

2.7.1 Configuring a Non-Protection Chain

If a service in the chain does not need to be protected, you can configure a non-protection chain.
In this case, all the timeslots in the chain can be used to transmit the service.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.
l On the NM, the data of each NE must be configured, and fibers must be created correctly.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create Protection Subnet > NP Chain from the Main Menu to
display the Create SDH Protection Subnet dialog box.
Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.
Generally, enter the default name, for example, non-protection chain_1.
Step 3 Select the capacity level of the protection subnet,
for example, STM-4.
Step 4 Select Resource Sharing and Assigned by VC4 as needed.
NOTE

l Resource Sharing indicates that a port is mapped into multiple protection subnets. When multiple
protection subnets occupy a port of a board, Resource Sharing must be selected. When different
protection subnets occupy different ports of a board, Resource Sharing is not required.
l Assigned by VC4 indicates that different VC4s belong to different protection subnets to achieve virtual
optical path protection. For example, in the case of an STM-16 fiber, the first through fourth VC4s
belong to an STM-4 MS shared protection, while the fifth through eighth VC4s belong to a non-
protection ring. If you enable multiple MSPs for a single optical port, you can configure multiple MSP
rings by VC4 for the optical port.

Step 5 Select a node to create a non-protection chain. Double-click an NE in the Main Topology and
add it to the left node list. At the same time, is displayed on the NE icon. Double-click the
NE icon again to cancel the selection.
Step 6 Click Next to display the Select Link dialog box. Set parameters, such as Physical Link
Information.
Step 7 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. Then the Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.

----End

2.7.2 Configuring a Non-Protection Ring

When services on a ring do not need protection, you can configure a non-protection (NP) ring.
All timeslots on the ring can be used to transmit services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-21

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.
l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > NP Ring from the Main Menu
to display the Create SDH Protection Subnet dialog box.
Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.
The default name is usually used, for example, NP_Ring_1.
Step 3 Select the rate of the protection subnet,
for example, STM-4.
Step 4 Select Resource Sharing and Assigned by VC4 as needed.
l Resource Sharing indicates that a port is mapped into multiple protection subnets. When
multiple protection subnets occupy a port of a board, Resource Sharing must be selected.
When different protection subnets occupy different ports of a board, Resource Sharing is
not required.
l Assigned by VC4 indicates that different VC4s belong to different protection subnets to
achieve virtual optical path protection. For example, in the case of an STM-16 fiber, the first
through fourth VC4s belong to an STM-4 MS shared protection, while the fifth through eighth
VC4s belong to a non-protection ring. If you enable multiple MSPs for a single optical port,
you can configure multiple MSP rings by VC4 for the optical port.
Step 5 Add nodes to the protection subnet to be created. Double-click the NE on the Main Topology
and add it to the node list in the left-hand pane. Meanwhile, is displayed on the NE icon. If
you want to cancel the selection, double-click the NE again.
Step 6 Click Next to proceed to the Select Link screen of the wizard. Set parameters, such as Physical
Link Information.
Step 7 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. Then the Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.

----End

2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet

The MS ring protection scheme is adopted in a common ring network. Normally, it is adopted
to protect a channel to transmit additional services. By running the APS protocol, it achieves the
MS level protection.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.
l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Precautions
l The number of nodes in an MSP ring cannot exceed 16.

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

l When creating a protection subnet, select SDH NEs only. It is not required to select WDM
equipment.
l Starting the protocol controller may interrupt the service.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > 2f_MS_SPRing from the Main
Menu. The Prompt dialog box is displayed. Click OK to display the Create SDH Protection
Subnet dialog box.
NOTE

l To create a four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH
Protection Subnet > 4f_MS_SPRing from the Main Menu to display the related dialog box.
l To create a two-fiber unidirectional MS shared protection ring, choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH
Protection Subnet > 2f_MS_DPRing from the Main Menu to display the related dialog box.

Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.

The default name is usually used, for example, 2f_MS SPRing_1.
Step 3 Select the rate of the protection subnet, for example, STM-4.

Step 4 Select Resource Sharing, Assigned by VC4, or Transoceanic Protocol according to the
requirement.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-23

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

NOTE

l Resource Sharing indicates that a port is mapped into multiple protection subnets. When multiple
protection subnets occupy the same port of a board, Resource Sharing must be selected. When different
protection subnets occupy different ports of a board, Resource Sharing is not required. If MSP
Sharing is enabled, you can select the Resource Sharing check box to map a port of the board to
multiple MSP subnets.
l Assigned by VC4 indicates that different VC-4s belong to different protection subnets to realize virtual
optical path protection. For example, in the case of an STM-16 fiber, the first to fourth VC-4s are
allocated for the STM-4 MS shared protection, and the fifth to eighth VC-4s are allocated for the non-
protection.
l Transoceanic Protocol indicates whether the transoceanic MS protocol is enabled. If the transoceanic
MS protocol is enabled, the services are switched on the source and end nodes in the case of a switching
on the transoceanic ring network. This significantly shortens the duration of the service interruption in
the case of long-distance transmission and improves the service transmission quality. Hence, if a
transoceanic MS is configured, you need to select the Transoceanic Protocol option to enable the
transoceanic MS protocol.

Step 5 Add nodes to the protection subnet to be created. Double-click the NE on the Main Topology
to add it to the node list in the left-hand pane. Meanwhile, is displayed on the NE icon. If you
want to cancel the selection, double-click the NE again.
NOTE

For easy maintenance, the nodes should be added anticlockwise to the protection subnet.

Step 6 Set the attribute of the nodes. Select MSP Node in this example.
Step 7 Click Next to proceed to the Select Link screen of the wizard. Set parameters, such as Physical
Link Information.
NOTE

l If there are multiple fibers between two NEs, select them from the Physical Link Information drop-
down list.
l If Assigned by VC4 is selected, you can select the working and protection VC4 timeslots as needed.

Step 8 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. Then the Operation Result prompt box is
displayed. Click Close.
Step 9 Right-click the protection subnet and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut
menu.
Step 10 Click the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab to check whether the protocol controller starts.
If not, select all the NEs of the protection subnet. Right-click and choose Start/Stop Protocol
> Start from the shortcut menu. Click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed twice. Ensure that
the status of all the values in the Protocol Controller column is Protocol Started.
Step 11 Click the Protection Subnet Parameters tab and set the WTR time and SD Condition as
needed. Click Apply to deliver the configuration. The WTR time of all NEs in the same
protection subnet should be the same.

NOTE

The default value is 600s.

----End

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

2.7.4 Creating a Linear MS Protection Subnet

In a chain network, an NE can protect a service in different sections of the fiber after a linear
MS protection subnet is created.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.
l The NE data must be configured, and fibers must be properly created.

Precautions
Fibers that are related to an linear MSP cannot be used by other protection subnets. That is, an
linear MSP and other subnets cannot create virtual fibers together.
Starting the protocol controller may interrupt the service.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection Subnet > 1+1 linear MSP from the Main
Menu to display the Create SDH Protection Subnet dialog box.
NOTE

To create a M:N linear MS protection scheme, choose Protection Subnet > Create SDH Protection
Subnet > M:N Linear MSP from the Main Menu to display the related dialog box.

Step 2 Enter the name of the protection subnet.

The default name is usually used, for example, 1+1_MSP_1.
Step 3 Select the rate of the protection subnet, for example, STM-4.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-25

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Step 4 Set Revertive Mode and Switching Mode based on the protection type and requirements.
NOTE

l For M:N linear MS protection scheme, set the number of working links to N. M indicates the number of
protection links and cannot be set. Currently, the value is 1 only.
l Revertive Mode refers to the handling strategy adopted after the faulty line recovers to normal.
l Non-Revertive: The service does not automatically revert to the working channel after the faulty line
recovers to normal.
l Revertive: The service automatically reverts to the working channel after the faulty line recovers to
normal.
l Switching Mode refers to the switching strategy adopted after a fault occurs to the line.
l Single-ended switching: To protect services, switching occurs at the receive end when the receive end
is faulty and at the transmit end when the transmit end is faulty.
l Dual-ended switching: To protect services, the switching occurs at the receive and transmit ends when
either end is faulty.
l If multiple protection subnets uses one port of a board, you need to check the Resource Sharing check box.
If different protection subnets use different ports of a board, do not check this check box.
l Select the Assigned by VC4 option when there are different VC4s belonging to different protection subnets
to achieve virtual optical path protection. For example, for an STM-16 fiber, the VC4s 1-4 belong to an
STM-4 MSP, and VC4s 5-8 belong to a PP.

Step 5 Add nodes to the protection subnet to be created. Double-click the NE on the Main Topology
to add it to the node list in the left-hand pane. Meanwhile, is displayed on the NE icon. If you
want to cancel the selection, double-click the NE again.

Step 6 Click Next to proceed to the Select Link of the wizard. Set the Physical Link Information of
Working Link and Protection Link.

2-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

Step 7 Click Finish to deliver the configuration data. The Operation Result prompt box is displayed.
ClickClose.
Step 8 Right-click the protection subnet and choose Protection Subnet Attributes from the shortcut
menu.
Step 9 Click the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab to check whether the protocol controller is
started.
NOTE

If the protocol controller is not started, select all the NEs of the protection subnet. Right-click them and
choose Start/Stop Protocol > Start from the shortcut menu. Click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed
twice. Ensure that the status of all the values in the Protocol Controller column is Protocol Started.

Step 10 Click the Protection Subnet Parameters tab and set the WTR time and SD condition as
needed. Click Apply to deliver the configuration.

NOTE

The WTR time of all NEs in the same protection subnet should be the same.

----End

2.8 Configuring Clocks

A clock is the basis for the normal running of NEs. You must configure clocks for all NEs prior
to configuring services. In addition, you need to configure clock protection for complex
networks.
2.8.1 Configuring the NE Clock Source
Before configuring services, you must configure the NE clock source and specify the priority
level to ensure that correct clock trace relations are created for all the NEs in the network.
2.8.2 Configuring the Clock Source Protection
In a complicated clock network, you need to configure the clock protection for all NEs. After
you set the clock source and specify the clock priority level for the NEs, you can enable the
standard SSM or extended SSM protocol to prevent the NEs from tracing an incorrect clock
source. This is how the clocks are protected.

2.8.1 Configuring the NE Clock Source

Before configuring services, you must configure the NE clock source and specify the priority
level to ensure that correct clock trace relations are created for all the NEs in the network.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-27

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Background Information
To implement clock protection, you must configure at least two traceable clock sources for the
equipment.

After you set the clock sources for all the NEs, query the networkwide clock trace status
again. For details, see 8.23 Viewing the Clock Trace Search.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source
Priority from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query the existing clock source.

Step 3 Click Create. In the Add Clock Source dialog box, select a new clock source and click OK.

Step 4 Set Lowest traceable clock quality of the clock source in the Lowest traceable clock
quality drop-down list.

Step 5 Optional: If an external clock source is selected, select External Clock Source Mode according
to the type of external clock signals. For 2 Mbit/s clocks, specify the Synchronous Status
Byte to deliver SSM message.

Step 6 Select a clock source, and click or to adjust its priority level. The clock
sources are arranged in the descending order. The clock source on top is the preferred one for
the NE.
NOTE

Internal clock sources have the lowest priority because of their low precision.

Step 7 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
NOTE

If the clock trace relation changes because of the clock source change, the Prompt dialog box is displayed,
asking you whether to refresh the clock trace relation. Usually you can click OK. If you select Disable
Prompting Next Time, the Prompt dialog box is not displayed even when the clock trace relation changes.

----End

2.8.2 Configuring the Clock Source Protection

In a complicated clock network, you need to configure the clock protection for all NEs. After
you set the clock source and specify the clock priority level for the NEs, you can enable the
standard SSM or extended SSM protocol to prevent the NEs from tracing an incorrect clock
source. This is how the clocks are protected.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

2-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Subnet
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Clock Subnet tab. Click Query to query the existing parameter settings.

Step 3 Select Start Standard SSM Protocol or Start Extended SSM Protocol.
NOTE

The same SSM protection protocol must be used within the same clock protection subnet.

Step 4 Set the subnet number of the clock subnet to which the NE is associated.
NOTE

Allocate the same subnet number to NEs tracing the same clock source.

Step 5 Optional: If the extended SSM protocol starts, set the clock ID of the clock source.

Step 6 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.

Step 7 Optional: If the clock ID is specified for the line clock of an NE, click the Clock ID Status tab,
and set the Enabled Status to Enabled. Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box, click
Close.

----End

2.9 Configuring Orderwire

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the T2000.
2.9.1 Configuring Orderwire
To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
2.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls
To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent
voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
2.9.3 Configuring Express Orderwire
In the case of two NEs without a fiber connection, you can configure the express orderwire to
provide the maintenance personnel with an express orderwire channel between the NEs.
2.9.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets
When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-29

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference
calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.

2.9.1 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the General tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.
NOTE

l Call Waiting Time should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication. When
the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.
l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is
eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length
must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to 2.9.4 Dividing Orderwire
Subnets.
l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.
l If the length of the subnet number is 1, the first digit of the two orderwire numbers must be the same.
If the length of the subnet number is 2, the first two digits of the two orderwire numbers must be the
same.

Step 4 Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

2.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent
voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.s

Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.

2-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Port pane, select the port where you want to configure a
conference call, and click .
NOTE

If the optical interfaces that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing
loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.

Step 4 Click Apply.

A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

Step 6 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE

The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwire
phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommended
to be 9999.

Step 7 Click Apply.

----End

Example
You can follow the sample configuration to avoid a conference call loop.

As shown in the figure, if conference calls are configured for all optical ports, howls are caused.
Configure a conference call for NE3-7-SL16-1 only, rather than NE3-12-SL16-1.

2.9.3 Configuring Express Orderwire

In the case of two NEs without a fiber connection, you can configure the express orderwire to
provide the maintenance personnel with an express orderwire channel between the NEs.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-31

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
2 Creating the Network Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
l The SCC board must be created.
l Two NEs must be connected through serial ports or by a telephone line.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the Auxiliary tab.

Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 3 Set the SDH NNI Connection.

NOTE

l Use a serial port line to connect the communication ports and a telephone line to connect the phone
ports between two NEs.
l The auxiliary attributes configuration items of different equipment differ with each other to some
extent. Hence, the selected communication port and phone port must be consistent with the actual
equipment.

Step 4 Click Apply.

A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

2-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 2 Creating the Network

Step 6 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to configure the orderwire on another station.

----End

2.9.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are
configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference
calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l Conference calls must be configured.
l Applies to OptiX OSN series products.

Background Information
Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one
or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call
number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For
example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference
call number of the subnet 1 is 199.

The optical interfaces with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

The different optical interfaces on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence,
an NE can belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet NO. Length.
NOTE

When the Subnet NO. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the
range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet NO. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical
Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.

Step 3 Click the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface tab.

Step 4 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and enter
a subnet number.
NOTE

The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.

Step 6 Click Apply. Then, click Closed in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-33

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

3 Configuring SDH Services

About This Chapter

Before configuring SDH services, it is recommended that you query the resource occupation of
the ports on the NE by using the T2000.
3.1 Basic Concepts
The following basic concepts help you understand and configure the relevant SDH services
correctly.
3.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain
Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection chain separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring the services on the
non-protection chain.
3.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring
Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring the services on the
non-protection ring.
3.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services
In the case of the 1+1 linear multiplex section protection (MSP), services are transmitted on the
working path and the protection path at the same time. The sink NE selects the services from
the working path in normal cases, and selects services from the protection path when the working
path becomes faulty.
3.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services
In the case of the 1:1 linear MSP, services are transmitted on the working path and the sink NE
receives the services from the working path in normal cases. When the working path becomes
faulty, the services are switched to the protection path for transmission and the sink NE receives
the services from the protection path.
3.6 Configuring Two-Fiber Unidirectional MSP Services
The two-fiber unidirectional MSP services can provide network-level protection for the services
on NEs on the MSP ring. On the T2000, you can add all the NEs on the MSP ring to the protection
subnet to create a two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.
3.7 Configuring Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services
To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP subnet
protection and MSP services separately. There is no requirement for the configuration sequence.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.8 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services

The four-fiber bidirectional MSP services can provide network-level protection for the services
on NEs on the MSP ring. On the T2000, you can add all the NEs on the MSP ring to the protection
subnet to create a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.
3.9 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring
The transoceanic MS provides path protection for the higher order services on a transoceanic
ring network by using the transoceanic protocol.
3.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring
Compared with the services on an MSP ring, the services on an SNCP ring have dedicated
physical paths as the protection paths. In addition, the services on the SNCP ring are dually fed
and selectively received. When you configure services on the SNCP ring, you need not configure
the protection subnet and the services separately, but you need to configure the working services
and protection services separately.
3.11 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain
To configure the services on the SNCP ring, you can configure the working service and the
protection service directly, without creating the protection subnet. To configure the services on
the non-protection chain, you need to configure the services only after the protection subnet is
created.
3.12 Configuring Services on the MSP Ring with a Non-Protection Chain
Configure the protection subnet for the MSP, protection subnet for the non-protection chain, and
services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain separately. It is recommended that you
configure the protection subnets before configuring the services on the MSP ring with a non-
protection chain.
3.13 Configuring Services on the MSP Tangent Rings
The utilization of service timeslots on each MSP tangent ring at the tangent NE is high, and the
network structure is cost-efficient and practical. Hence, the MSP tangent ring is widely used on
the SDH network. To construct the MSP tangent rings, you need to connect two physical ring
networks through one NE (namely, the tangent NE). With respect to service configuration, the
MSP tangent ring has no great difference from the MSP tangent ring of the single ring network.
You need to configure a bidirectional path service on the tangent node where the service enters
the sink ring network from the source ring network.
3.14 Configuring Services on the MSP Intersecting Rings
Configuring services on the MSP intersecting rings is complex. The capacity of inter-ring
services is low. The protection mechanism, however, is complete. When a fiber is cut on two
MSP intersecting or tangent rings, the service protection is implemented. In addition, the MSP
intersecting rings can implement service protection when an intersecting NE fails. Hence, the
MSP intersecting rings are applicable to the scenarios where the services need to be protected
when one intersecting node fails.
3.15 Configuring Services on the SNCP Tangent Rings
With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent rings are similar to the MSP tangent
rings. In the case of the SNCP tangent rings, the services can be protected when one fiber section
is cut on either SNCP ring. The service configuration on the tangent NE is crucial in the service
configuration on the SNCP tangent rings. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent
NE must be configured with four pairs of protection groups.
3.16 Configuring Services on the SNCP Intersecting Rings
Compared to the SNCP tangent rings, the method of configuring the services on the SNCP
intersecting rings is complex and the protection scheme of the SNCP intersecting rings is
complete. In the case of the SNCP tangent rings and the SNCP intersecting rings, the services
can be protected when one fiber section is cut on either SNCP ring. In addition, the SNCP

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

intersecting rings can implement service protection when an intersecting NE fails. Hence, the
SNCP intersecting rings are applicable to the scenarios where the services need to be protected
when one intersecting node fails.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.1 Basic Concepts

The following basic concepts help you understand and configure the relevant SDH services
correctly.

Unidirectional Service
The unidirectional service indicates the service that is received and transmitted on different
paths. A unidirectional service created between NE A and NE B can only be transmitted from
NE A (source end) to NE B (sink end) or only be transmitted from NE B (source end) to NE A
(sink end).

Bidirectional Service
The bidirectional service indicates the service that is received and transmitted on the same path.
A bidirectional service created between NE A and NE B can be transmitted and received either
from NE A to NE B or from NE B to NE A.

MSP
The multiplex section protection (MSP) provides a function that switches the signals from the
working section to the protection section between two multiplex section termination (MST)
functions.

MS Shared Protection Ring

As an SDH ring structure, the MS shared protection ring provides the working and protection
paths for each node on the ring. When the services on the working path are abnormal or
interrupted, the services are automatically switched to the protection path for further
transmission, thus protecting the services against the loss.

Two-Fiber MS Shared Protection Ring

To form a two-fiber MS shared protection ring, you need to use two fibers. In each fiber, one
half of paths are used as working timeslots, and the other half of paths are used as protection
timeslots. For example, in the case of an STM-16 service, VC-4s numbered 1 to 8 are used as
working timeslots and VC-4s numbered 9 to 16 are used as protection timeslots. When VC-4s
numbered 1 to 8 are abnormal or fail, the services are switched to the corresponding protection
timeslots 9 to 16 for further transmission.

SNCP Principle
The sub-network connection protection (SNCP) is defined by the ITU-T Recommendations.
With the 1+1 single-ended switching function, the SNCP is used for protecting services that
travel across different subnets. The SNCP is characterized by the dual-fed and selective-
receiving mode.

Tangent Ring
The tangent ring indicates an SDH network topology structure wherein two rings are connected
Through a common node NE (namely, the tangent NE), and all inter-ring services are transmitted

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

through the tangent NE. The tangent NE is crucial to the entire network. If the tangent NE fails,
the inter-ring services are interrupted.

Intersecting Ring
The intersecting ring indicates two ring networks that are connected by two common node NEs
to implement the inter-ring connection. The inter-ring services are simultaneously transmitted
and received over two intersecting NEs. The inter-ring services are simultaneously transmitted
and received over two intersecting NEs. If one intersecting NE is faulty, services are not affected.
Thus, the protection capability of the intersecting ring topology is much stronger than the
protection capability of the tangent ring topology.

Principles for Generating SNCP Services

The SNCP is characterized by the dual-fed and selective receiving mode. Hence, to configure
the SNCP service, you need to configure the dual-fed service and the selective receiving service.
On the T2000, the services can be automatically created. When the selective receiving service
of an NE is configured on the T2000, the dual-fed service of the NE can be automatically created.
Hence, you only need to configure the selective receiving service during the actual service
configuration. That is, if the SNCP service pair is configured, the SNCP service configuration
is complete.

3.2 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Chain

Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection chain separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring the services on the
non-protection chain.

3.2.1 Networking Diagram

You can configure a non-protection chain if the services on the chain need not be protected. In
this case, all the timeslots on the chain can transmit services.
3.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure services on a non-protection chain, you need to plan certain traffic directions and
timeslot allocation schemes for the services on the non-protection chain.
3.2.3 Configuration Process
The configuration of services on a non-protection chain is independent of the creation of the
protection subnet. To configure the services on the non-protection chain when the protection
subnet is already created, configure the SDH services between the line boards at the source end
and sink end.

3.2.1 Networking Diagram

You can configure a non-protection chain if the services on the chain need not be protected. In
this case, all the timeslots on the chain can transmit services.
Figure 3-1 shows a point-to-point non-protection chain. In this example, the JL64 boards are
used on the source NE (NE1) and the sink NE (NE2) as line boards to transmit SDH services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-1 Networking diagram of the non-protection chain

NE 1 NE 2

Line Board 1-JL64 Line Board 1-JL64

Line Board 17-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64

3.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure services on a non-protection chain, you need to plan certain traffic directions and
timeslot allocation schemes for the services on the non-protection chain.

Figure 3-2 shows the signal flow of the services on the non-protection chain and the timeslot
allocation to the services on the non-protection chain. In this example, the STM-1 service is
added to or dropped from NE1 and NE2.

Figure 3-2 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1 17
VC4: VC4-1
NE1 NE2

Line Board Line Board Line Board Line Board

1-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL64 17-JL64

Line Board

Traffic flow on the non-protection chain

3.2.3 Configuration Process

The configuration of services on a non-protection chain is independent of the creation of the
protection subnet. To configure the services on the non-protection chain when the protection
subnet is already created, configure the SDH services between the line boards at the source end
and sink end.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.1 Configuring a Non-Protection
Chain.
l You must be familiar with 3.2.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, Level of the related services is set to

VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the services are transmitted and

l received on the same path. That is, the services are
bidirectional services.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-1, the JL64 board in slot 1 of
(SDH-1) NE1 is used as the source board.

Source 1 In this example, the service source occupies the first

Timeslot Range VC-4.
(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-1, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE1 is used as the sink line board.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the service sink occupies the first
Range(e.g. VC-4.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Refer to Step 1 to configure SDH services on the sink NE (NE2). Set the required parameters.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, Level of the related services is set to

VC4.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the services are transmitted and received
on the same path. That is, the services are bidirectional
services.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-1, the JL64 board in slot 1 of NE2
(SDH-1) is used as the source board.

Source Timeslot 1 In this example, the service source occupies the first
Range(e.g.1,3-6) VC-4.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-1, the JL64 board in slot 17 of NE2
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, the service sink occupies the first VC-4.
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.3 Configuring Services on the Non-Protection Ring

Configure the protection subnet and the services on the non-protection ring separately. It is
recommended that you configure the protection subnet before configuring the services on the
non-protection ring.

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

3.3.1 Networking Diagram

When the services on a ring need not be protected, you can configure a non-protection ring. All
timeslots on the ring can transmit services.
3.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure services on a non-protection ring, you need to plan certain traffic directions and
timeslot allocation schemes for the services on the non-protection ring.
3.3.3 Configuration Process
The configuration of the services on a non-protection ring is independent of the creation of the
protection subnet. To configure the services on the non-protection ring, configure the cross-
connect grooming of the SDH services on the line boards of the source and sink NEs and the
pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if the protection subnet is already created.

3.3.1 Networking Diagram

When the services on a ring need not be protected, you can configure a non-protection ring. All
timeslots on the ring can transmit services.

Figure 3-3 shows a non-protection ring consisting of four pieces of equipment. In this example,
the JL64 boards are used on the four NEs to implement the cross-connect grooming of services.

Figure 3-3 Networking diagram of the non-protection ring

Line board 1-JL16
Line board 17-JL64

17
NE1

Line board 1-JL64 1

Two-fiber bidirectional
Line board 17-JL64 NE2 NE4
non-protection ring
17

NE3
17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64

STM-64 line board

STM-16 line board

3.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure services on a non-protection ring, you need to plan certain traffic directions and
timeslot allocation schemes for the services on the non-protection ring.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-4 shows the signal flow of the services on the non-protection ring and the timeslot
allocation to the services on the non-protection ring. In this example, the STM-1 service is added
to or dropped from NE1 and NE3, and passes through NE2.

Figure 3-4 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1xSTM-1
Line Board Line Board
1-JL16 17-JL64

VC4: VC4-1

17 NE1

1
VC4: VC4-1
VC4: VC4-1
Line Board Line Board
Line Board Line Board NE2 Non-protection ring NE4
1-JL64 17-JL64
1-JL64 17-JL64
17

NE3
17

VC4: VC4-1

Traffic flow Line Board Line Board

STM-64 line board 1xSTM-1 1-JL16 17-JL64

STM-16 line board

3.3.3 Configuration Process

The configuration of the services on a non-protection ring is independent of the creation of the
protection subnet. To configure the services on the non-protection ring, configure the cross-
connect grooming of the SDH services on the line boards of the source and sink NEs and the
pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if the protection subnet is already created.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.2 Configuring a Non-Protection
Ring.
l You must be familiar with 3.3.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-3, the JL16 board in slot 1 of NE1
(SDH-1) is used as the source line board.

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE1 and NE3. Hence, the service source
Range(e.g. occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-3, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE1 is used as the sink line board.

Sink 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE1 and NE3. Hence, the service sink occupies
Range(e.g. the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE3). Refer to Step 1 to configure the SDH services
on NE3. Set the required parameters.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured. Hence,

Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and received on

the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-3, the JL16 board in slot 1 of NE3 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-11

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured between

Timeslot NE1 and NE3. Hence, the service source occupies the first
Range(e.g. VC-4.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-3, the JL64 board in slot 17 of NE3
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured between

Range(e.g. NE1 and NE3. Hence, the service sink occupies the first
1,3-6) VC-4.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE2.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-3, the JL64 board in slot 1 of NE2
(SDH-1) is used as the source line board.

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE1 and NE3. Hence, the service source
Range(e.g. occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-3, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE2 is used as the sink line board.

Sink 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE1 and NE3. Hence, the service sink occupies
Range(e.g. the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.4 Configuring 1+1 Linear MSP Services

In the case of the 1+1 linear multiplex section protection (MSP), services are transmitted on the
working path and the protection path at the same time. The sink NE selects the services from
the working path in normal cases, and selects services from the protection path when the working
path becomes faulty.

3.4.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of the point-to-point 1+1 linear MSP services is simple. Two NEs are
connected with two pairs of fibers.
3.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure the 1+1 linear MSP services, you can configure the services that need to be added
to the source NE and then dropped from the sink NE if the 1+1 linear MSP is already created.
3.4.3 Configuration Process
After the linear 1+1 MSP is created, the due-fed services are automatically created on the T2000.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-13

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.4.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of the point-to-point 1+1 linear MSP services is simple. Two NEs are
connected with two pairs of fibers.

As shown in Figure 3-5, the JL16 boards are used on NE1 and NE2 to implement the cross-
connect grooming of STM-1 services and the SL64 boards are used on NE1 and NE2 to transmit
SDH services.

Figure 3-5 Networking diagram of the 1+1 linear MSP services

17 17
Line Board 1-JL16 Line Board 1-JL16
Line Board 17-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64
Line Board 18-JL64 Line Board 18-JL64
18 18
NE2 NE1

3.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure the 1+1 linear MSP services, you can configure the services that need to be added
to the source NE and then dropped from the sink NE if the 1+1 linear MSP is already created.

As shown in Figure 3-6, the signal flow of the 1+1 linear MSP services and the timeslot
allocation to the 1+1 linear MSP services are as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1→NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then transmitted on the working path and
the protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE2),
which selects the services from the working path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2→NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then transmitted on the working path and
the protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE1),
which selects the services from the working path.
l The STM-1 service between NE1 and NE2 occupies the first VC-4 on the SDH link between
NE1 and NE2.

When the working path from NE1 to NE2 becomes faulty, the signal flow in the case of a single-
ended switching is as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1→NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then transmitted on the working path and
the protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE2),
which selects the services from the protection path.
l The services between NE2 and NE1 are not affected. Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1:
NE2→NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then transmitted on the working path and
the protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE1),
which selects the services from the working path.

When the working path from NE1 to NE2 becomes faulty, the traffic flow in the case of dual-
ended switching is as follows:

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1→NE2

Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then transmitted on the working path and
the protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE2),
which selects the services from the protection path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2→NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then transmitted on the working path and
the protection path at the same time. Then, the services are dropped from the sink NE (NE1),
which selects the services from the protection path.

Figure 3-6 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

17 17
VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

1xSTM-1 1xSTM-1

18 18
NE2: NE1:
Line Board Line Board Line Board Line Board Line Board Line Board
1-JL16 17-JL64 18-JL64 1-JL16 17-JL64 18-JL64

Traffic flow on
the working STM-16 line board
path
Traffic flow on
the protection STM-64 line board
path

3.4.3 Configuration Process

After the linear 1+1 MSP is created, the due-fed services are automatically created on the T2000.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.4 Creating a Linear MS
Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-15

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-5, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board for the bidirectional service from
NE1 to NE2.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-5, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE2).

1. Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-5, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board.

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-5, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board for the bidirectional service from
NE1 to NE2.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.5 Configuring 1:1 Linear MSP Services

In the case of the 1:1 linear MSP, services are transmitted on the working path and the sink NE
receives the services from the working path in normal cases. When the working path becomes
faulty, the services are switched to the protection path for transmission and the sink NE receives
the services from the protection path.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-17

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.5.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of the point-to-point 1:1 linear MSP services is simple. Two NEs are
connected with two pairs of fibers.
3.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure the 1:1 linear MSP services, you can configure the services that need to be added
to the source NE and then dropped from the sink NE if the 1:1 linear MSP is already created.
3.5.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the 1:1 linear MSP services.

3.5.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of the point-to-point 1:1 linear MSP services is simple. Two NEs are
connected with two pairs of fibers.

As shown in Figure 3-7, the JL16 boards are used on NE1 and NE2 to add and drop STM-1
services and the JL64 boards are used on NE1 and NE2 to transmit SDH services.

Figure 3-7 Networking diagram of the 1:1 linear MSP services

17 17
Line Board 1-JL16 Line Board 1-JL16
Line Board 17-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64
Line Board 18-JL64 Line Board 18-JL64
18 18
NE2 NE1

3.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure the 1:1 linear MSP services, you can configure the services that need to be added
to the source NE and then dropped from the sink NE if the 1:1 linear MSP is already created.

As shown in Figure 3-8, the signal flow of the 1:1 linear MSP services and the timeslot allocation
to the 1:1 linear MSP services are as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1→NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then dropped from the sink NE (NE2). The
services are transmitted on the working path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2→NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then dropped from the sink NE (NE1). The
services are transmitted on the working path.
l The STM-1 service between NE1 and NE2 occupies the first VC-4 on the SDH link between
NE1 and NE2.

When the working path between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, the signal flow is as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE2: NE1→NE2
Services are added to the source NE (NE1) and then dropped from the sink NE (NE2). The
services are transmitted on the protection path.
l Traffic direction from NE2 to NE1: NE2→NE1
Services are added to the source NE (NE2) and then dropped from the sink NE (NE1). The
services are transmitted on the protection path.

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

The differences between the 1:1 linear MSP service and the 1+1 linear MSP service are as
follows:
l In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP services, services are transmitted on the working path
and the protection path at the same time. The sink NE selects the services from the working
path.
l In the case of the 1:1 linear MSP services, services are transmitted on only the working
path. Services are switched to the protection path for transmission only when the working
path becomes faulty.

Figure 3-8 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

17 17
VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

1xSTM-1 1xSTM-1

18 18
NE2: NE1:
Line Board Line Board Line Board Line Board Line BoardLine Board
1-JL16 17-JL64 18-JL64 1-JL16 17-JL64 18-JL64

Traffic flow on
the working path STM-16 line board
Traffic flow on the
protection path STM-64 line board

3.5.3 Configuration Process

This topic describes how to configure the 1:1 linear MSP services.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.4 Creating a Linear MS
Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-19

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured. Hence,

Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-7, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board for the bidirectional service from
NE1 to NE2.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-7, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE2).

1. Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-7, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board.

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-7, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board for the bidirectional service from
NE1 to NE2.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.6 Configuring Two-Fiber Unidirectional MSP Services

The two-fiber unidirectional MSP services can provide network-level protection for the services
on NEs on the MSP ring. On the T2000, you can add all the NEs on the MSP ring to the protection
subnet to create a two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.

3.6.1 Networking Diagram

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-21

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

The networking diagram of a single two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name the NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps you plan the traffic directions and configure services
in future.
3.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure the two-fiber unidirectional MSP services, you can configure the services that need
to be added to the ring network on the source NE, to pass through the intermediate nodes, and
then to be dropped from the sink NE if the MSP protection subnet is already created.
3.6.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the two-fiber unidirectional MSP services.

3.6.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of a single two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name the NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps you plan the traffic directions and configure services
in future.

As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL16 boards are used on NE1 and NE3 on the ring to add and drop
STM-1 services and the JL64 boards are used on NE1 and NE3 as line boards to transmit SDH
services.

Figure 3-9 Networking diagram of the two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

Line board 1 17 Line board

1-JL64 Two-fiber unidirectional 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64 NE2 MSP ring NE4 Line board 17-JL64
17 1

NE3
18 17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure the two-fiber unidirectional MSP services, you can configure the services that need
to be added to the ring network on the source NE, to pass through the intermediate nodes, and
then to be dropped from the sink NE if the MSP protection subnet is already created.

As shown in Figure 3-10, the signal flow of the two-fiber unidirectional MSP services and the
timeslot allocation to the two-fiber unidirectional MSP services are as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE3: NE1→NE2→NE3

3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

The STM-1 service is added to the ring network on the source NE (NE1), passes through
NE2, and then is dropped from the sink NE (NE3).
l Traffic direction from NE3 to NE1: NE3→NE4→NE1
The STM-1 service is added to the ring network on the source NE (NE3), passes through
NE4, and then is dropped from the sink NE (NE1).
l The STM-1 service is transmitted on the first VC-4.
When the transmission path between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, the signal flow of the two-
fiber unidirectional MSP services and the timeslot allocation to the two-fiber unidirectional MSP
services are as follows:
l Traffic direction from NE1 to NE3: NE1→NE4→NE3→NE2→NE3 Services are added
to the ring network on the source NE (NE1) and switched from the original working path
to the protection path. Then, the services pass through NE4 and NE3. After that, the services
are switched from the protection path to the working path on NE2. Finally, the services are
dropped from NE3.
l The services from NE3 to NE1 are not affected, and the traffic direction is
NE3→NE4→NE1.
The differences between the two-fiber unidirectional MSP service and the two-fiber bidirectional
MSP service are as follows:
l The two-fiber unidirectional MSP service uses the diverse routes, whereas the two-fiber
bidirectional MSP service uses the uniform route.
l In the case of the two-fiber unidirectional MSP service, different fibers are used for the
working timeslot and the protection timeslot. That is, one fiber is used for carrying the
working service, and the other fiber is used for protection. In the case of the two-fiber
bidirectional MSP service, the same fiber is used for the working timeslot and the protection
timeslot. That is, a certain capacity of the fiber is used for carrying the working service,
and a certain capacity of the fiber is used for protection.

Figure 3-10 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1xSTM-1 NE1:
Line board Line board Line board
1-JL16 17-JL64 18-JL64

VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE2: NE1 NE4:
Line board Line board Line board Line board
1-JL64 17-JL64 1 1-JL64 17-JL64
17
VC4: VC4-1 Two-fiber
NE2 unidirectional MSP ring NE4 VC4: VC4-1
Service pass-through
Service pass-through
17 1

18 NE3
17

VC4: VC4-1 NE3:

Traffic flow on
STM-16 line board 1xSTM-1 Line board Line board Line board
the working path
1-JL16 17-JL64 18-JL64
Traffic flow on the STM-64 line board
protection path

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-23

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.6.3 Configuration Process

This topic describes how to configure the two-fiber unidirectional MSP services.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure unidirectional services from NE1 to NE3.
1. Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on

the ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is an
unidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the service
is set to Unidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL16 board in slot 1 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board for the unidirectional
service from NE1 to NE3.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the

Timeslot plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the

Timeslot plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

2. Configure pass-through services of NE2.

l Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
l Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is an
unidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the service
is set to Unidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 1 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board. You can select different
source boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the

Timeslot plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the

Timeslot plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

3. Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE3).

l Click . Select NE3 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
l Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-25

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on

the ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is an
unidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the service
is set to Unidirectional.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 18 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the

Timeslot plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range(e.g. to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL16 board in slot 1 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board for the unidirectional
service from NE1 to NE2.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the

Timeslot plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to
Range(e.g. 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure unidirectional services from NE3 to NE1.

To configure unidirectional services from NE3 to NE1, refer to Step 1.
1. Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE3).
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirection In this example, the service is transmitted and received

al on different paths. That is, the service is an
unidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the service
is set to Unidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board for the unidirectional service
from NE3 to NE1.

3-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

2. Configure pass-through services on NE4.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirection In this example, the service is transmitted and received

al on different paths. That is, the service is an
unidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the service
is set to Unidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

3. Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE1).

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-27

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirection In this example, the service is transmitted and received

al on different paths. That is, the service is an
unidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the service
is set to Unidirectional.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-9, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board for the bidirectional service from
NE3 to NE1.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

3-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

3.7 Configuring Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services

To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you need to create the MSP subnet
protection and MSP services separately. There is no requirement for the configuration sequence.
3.7.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram of a single two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name the NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps you plan the traffic directions and configure services
in future.
3.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services on a ring, configure the services that need
to be added to the ring network on the source NE, to pass through the intermediate nodes, and
to be dropped from the sink NE, if the MSP subnet is already created. In the case of the ring
network, more than one route is available from the source NE to the sink NE. In actual application
scenarios, not all the routes need to be configured. Hence, you need to plan and configure the
service signal flow and timeslots properly before the configuration.
3.7.3 Configuration Process
The configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services is independent of the creation of
the protection subnet. To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, configure the SDH
services on the source and sink NEs and the pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if
the protection subnet is already created.

3.7.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of a single two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name the NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps you plan the traffic directions and configure services
in future.
Figure 3-11 shows the networking of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring that consists of four
pieces of MSTP equipment. In this example, the JL16 boards are used on the source NE (NE1)
and the sink NE (NE3) to add and drop services and the JL64 boards are used on the source NE
(NE1) and the sink NE (NE3) to transmit SDH services.

Figure 3-11 Networking diagram of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 1-JL64 NE2 MSP ring NE4 Line board 17-JL64
Line board 17-JL64
17 1

NE3
18 17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-29

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services on a ring, configure the services that need
to be added to the ring network on the source NE, to pass through the intermediate nodes, and
to be dropped from the sink NE, if the MSP subnet is already created. In the case of the ring
network, more than one route is available from the source NE to the sink NE. In actual application
scenarios, not all the routes need to be configured. Hence, you need to plan and configure the
service signal flow and timeslots properly before the configuration.
Figure 3-12 shows the service signal flow of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services and the
timeslot allocation to the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services. In this example, the STM-1
service is added to the ring network on NE1, passes through NE2, and then is dropped from the
sink NE (NE3).

Figure 3-12 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE1:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
1-JL16 17-JL64

VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE2: NE1
Line Board Line Board
1-JL64 17-JL64 1
VC4: VC4-1
Service pass-through NE2 MSP ring NE4

17

18 NE3 17

NE4:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
STM-16 line board 1-JL16 18-JL64
Traffic flow
STM-64 line board

3.7.3 Configuration Process

The configuration of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services is independent of the creation of
the protection subnet. To configure the two-fiber bidirectional MSP services, configure the SDH

3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

services on the source and sink NEs and the pass-through services on the intermediate NEs if
the protection subnet is already created.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-11, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-12, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Hence, Source
Range(e.g. Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-11, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-12, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-31

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE3). Refer to Step 1 to configure the SDH services
on NE3. Set the required parameters.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the E1 service is configured on the ring.

Hence, Level of the E1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and received on

the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional service.
Hence, Direction of the service is set to Bidirectional.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-11, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-12, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot according to the plan. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.
Range(e.g. 1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-11, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board. You can select different sink boards
depending on the actual situation.

Sink Timeslot 1 As shown in Figure 3-12, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g. according to the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.
1,3-6) 1,3-6) is set to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE2.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the E1 service is configured on the ring.

Hence, Level of the E1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

3-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-11, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-12, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Hence, Source
Range(e.g. Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-11, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-12, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-33

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.8 Configuring Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Services

The four-fiber bidirectional MSP services can provide network-level protection for the services
on NEs on the MSP ring. On the T2000, you can add all the NEs on the MSP ring to the protection
subnet to create a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

3.8.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of a single four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name the NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps you plan the traffic directions and configure services
in future.
3.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you can configure the services that need
to be added to the ring network on the source NE, to pass through the intermediate nodes, and
then to be dropped from the sink NE if the MSP protection subnet is already created.
3.8.3 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services.

3.8.1 Networking Diagram

The networking diagram of a single four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is simple. When you
construct the network, follow a certain order to create and name the NEs and ensure that the
traffic flows in a proper direction. This helps you plan the traffic directions and configure services
in future.

As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL16 boards are used on NE1 and NE3 on the ring to add and drop
services and the JL64 boards are used on NE1 and NE3 to transmit SDH services.

Figure 3-13 Networking diagram of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

Line board 1-JL16
Line board 7-JL64
Line board 8-JL64
Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64
8 18

7 17
NE1
18 7 8
Line board 7-JL64 17 Line board 7-JL64
Line board 8-JL64 Four-fiber bidirectional Line board 8-JL64
Line board NE2 NE4 Line board
17-JL64 MSP ring 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64 7 17 Line board 18-JL64
8 18
NE3
17 7

18 8
Line board 1-JL16
Line board 7-JL64
Line board 8-JL64
Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

3.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services, you can configure the services that need
to be added to the ring network on the source NE, to pass through the intermediate nodes, and
then to be dropped from the sink NE if the MSP protection subnet is already created.
As shown in Figure 3-14, the signal flow of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services and the
timeslot allocation to the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services are as follows:
l Bidirectional traffic direction between NE1 and NE3: NE1←→NE2←→NE3
l The STM-1 service is added to or dropped from NE1 and NE3.
l The STM-1 service passes through NE2.
l The STM-1 service is transmitted on the first VC-4.
l The traffic direction of the forward working service is contrary to the traffic direction of
the forward protection service.
l The traffic direction of the reverse working service is contrary to the traffic direction of the
reverse protection service.
When both the working path and the protection path between NE1 and NE2 become faulty, the
signal flow of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services and the timeslot allocation to the four-
fiber bidirectional MSP services are as follows:
l Bidirectional traffic direction between NE1 and NE3:
NE1←→NE4←→NE3←→NE2←→NE3
l The services from NE1 to NE3 are added to the ring network on the source NE (NE1) and
switched from the original working path to the protection path. Then, the services pass
through NE4 and NE3. After that, the services are switched from the protection path to the
working path on NE2. Finally, the services are dropped from NE3.
l The traffic direction of the services from NE3 to NE1 is contrary to the traffic direction of
the services from NE1 to NE3. That is, the services from NE3 to NE1 are added to the ring
network on the source NE (NE3), reaches NE2 through the normal working path, and then
switched from the working path to the protection path on NE2. Then, the services pass
through NE3 and NE4. Finally, the services are dropped from NE1.
The difference between the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service and the two-fiber bidirectional
MSP service is as follows:
l Both the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service and the two-fiber bidirectional MSP service
use the uniform route.
l In the case of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP service, different fibers are used for the
working timeslot and the protection timeslot. That is, one fiber is used for carrying the
working service, and the other fiber is used for protection. In the case of the two-fiber
bidirectional MSP service, the same fiber is used for the working timeslot and the protection
timeslot. That is, a half capacity of the fiber is used for carrying the working service, and
the other half capacity of the fiber is used for protection.

CAUTION
The switching of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring includes section switching and ring
switching. When only the working link becomes faulty, the section switching is performed.
When both the working link and the protection link become faulty, the ring switching is
performed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-35

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-14 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE1:
1xSTM-1
Line Board Line Board
VC4: VC4-1 1-JL16 8-JL64
8

NE2:
NE1
Line Board Line Board
8-JL64 18-JL64 18
VC4: VC4-1
Service pass-through NE2 Four-fiber NE4
bidirectional MSP
8 ring

NE3
Traffic flow on the
forward working path
Traffic flow on the STM-16 line
backward working path board 18
Traffic flow on the
forward protection path STM-64 line VC4: VC4-1 NE3:
Traffic flow on the board 1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
backward protection path 1-JL16 18-JL64

3.8.3 Configuration Process

This topic describes how to configure the four-fiber bidirectional MSP services.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

3-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board for the service.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 8-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL64 board in slot 8 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure pass-through services on NE2.

1. Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL64 board in slot 18 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-37

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 8-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL64 board in slot 8 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board.

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE3).

1. Click . Select NE3 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL64 board in slot 18 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board.

Source VC4 VC4-1 In this example, the services require five VC-12s.
Source VC4 is set to VC4-1, because a VC-4 contains
63 VC-12s.

Source 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-13, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board for the service.

3-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 One STM-1 service is configured according to the plan.

Timeslot Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

3.9 Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring

The transoceanic MS provides path protection for the higher order services on a transoceanic
ring network by using the transoceanic protocol.
3.9.1 Networking Diagram
A transoceanic MSP ring can be a two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring or four-
fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring. When a fault occurs on the transoceanic ring
network, the ring switching is performed at the source and sink nodes and not on the two
neighboring nodes of the faulty point. This prevents the services from traveling across the ocean
repeatedly after the switching and thus prevents the transmission delay of a long-distance
transmission network such as the submarine cable system from increasing. The switching time
ranges from 0 ms to 300 ms.
3.9.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The transoceanic protocol is developed based on the normal MSP protocol. Compared with the
switching operations on the normal MS, certain switching operations are added on all the nodes
of the transoceanic MS. When a fault occurs on the transoceanic ring network, the switching is
performed at the source and sink nodes and not on the two neighboring nodes of the faulty point.
This prevents the services from traveling across the ocean repeatedly after the switching and
thus prevents the transmission delay of a long-distance transmission network such as the
submarine cable system from being increased.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-39

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.9.3 Configuration Process

The procedure for configuring a transoceanic MS is similar to the procedure for configuring a
normal MS. In the case of a transoceanic MS, however, the service table needs to be established,
which takes some time. Hence, you need to configure the services before configuring the
transoceanic MS on the entire ring. It is recommended that you do not enable or disable the
transoceanic protocol manually. The transoceanic MS should enter the normal state
automatically.

3.9.1 Networking Diagram

A transoceanic MSP ring can be a two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring or four-
fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring. When a fault occurs on the transoceanic ring
network, the ring switching is performed at the source and sink nodes and not on the two
neighboring nodes of the faulty point. This prevents the services from traveling across the ocean
repeatedly after the switching and thus prevents the transmission delay of a long-distance
transmission network such as the submarine cable system from increasing. The switching time
ranges from 0 ms to 300 ms.
As shown in Figure 3-15, the JL16 boards are used on NE1 and NE3 on the ring network to add
and drop services and the JL64 boards are used on NE1 and NE3 on the ring network to transmit
SDH services.

Figure 3-15 Networking diagram of the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 1-JL64 NE2 Transoceanic MSP ring NE4
Line board 17-JL64
Line board 17-JL64
17 1

NE3
18 17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

NOTE

l The transoceanic MS and ASON feature are mutually exclusive. That is, the ASON feature can be
configured on the transoceanic MS and the transoceanic MS can be configured on the ASON network.

3.9.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The transoceanic protocol is developed based on the normal MSP protocol. Compared with the
switching operations on the normal MS, certain switching operations are added on all the nodes
of the transoceanic MS. When a fault occurs on the transoceanic ring network, the switching is
performed at the source and sink nodes and not on the two neighboring nodes of the faulty point.
This prevents the services from traveling across the ocean repeatedly after the switching and

3-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

thus prevents the transmission delay of a long-distance transmission network such as the
submarine cable system from being increased.
Figure 3-16 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. In this example, one STM-1
service is configured so that the service is added to the ring network from NE1, passes through
NE2, and then is dropped from the sink NE (NE3).

Figure 3-16 Signal flow and timeslot allocation in normal cases

NE1:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
1-JL16 17-JL64

VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE2: NE1
Line Board Line Board
1-JL64 1-JL64 1
VC4: VC4-1
Service pass- NE2 NE4
through Transoceanic MSP ring

17

18 NE3 17

NE4:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
STM-16 line board 1-JL16 18-JL64
Traffic flow
STM-64 line board

Assume that a fault occurs on the section between NE1 and NE2. In this case, the transoceanic
MSP switching is performed. Figure 3-17 shows the signal flow and timeslot allocation after
the transoceanic MSP switching. The services are switched at the source and sink nodes of the
services of NE1 and NE3. In this manner, the path loopback is prevented and the service
transmission distance is decreased.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-41

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-17 Signal flow and timeslot allocation after the switching
NE1:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
1-JL16 17-JL64

VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE2: NE1
Line Board Line Board
1-JL64 1-JL64 1
VC4: VC4-1
Service Pass-through NE2 NE4
Transoceanic MSP ring
17

18 NE3 17

NE4:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
STM-16 line board 1-JL16 18-JL64
Traffic flow
STM-64 line board

NOTE
When the transoceanic MS is in the switched state, the extra services on the protection paths that are not
preempted by the working services during the switching are restored one minute after the switching is
performed.

3.9.3 Configuration Process

The procedure for configuring a transoceanic MS is similar to the procedure for configuring a
normal MS. In the case of a transoceanic MS, however, the service table needs to be established,
which takes some time. Hence, you need to configure the services before configuring the
transoceanic MS on the entire ring. It is recommended that you do not enable or disable the
transoceanic protocol manually. The transoceanic MS should enter the normal state
automatically.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.

3-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring
Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Precautions
All the MSs on the entire ring must use the transoceanic protocol. Otherwise, the switching
cannot be performed correctly. The equipment of versions that are available cannot check that
all the MSs on the entire ring use the same protocol.

Currently, the transoceanic MS does not support lower order services.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the services is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 In this example, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used as the
(SDH-1) source line board. See Figure 3-15. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-16, the total capacity of the

Timeslot service is 1xSTM-1 according to the plan. Hence,
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as the
(SDH-1) sink line board. See Figure 3-15. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-16, the total capacity of the

Timeslot service is 1xSTM-1 according to the plan. Hence, Sink
Range(e.g. Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-43

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE3). Refer to Step 1 and configure the SDH
services of NE3. Set the parameters as follows.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the E1 service is configured on the ring.

Hence, Level of the E1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and received on

the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional service.
Hence, Direction of the E1 service is set to Bidirectional.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used as the
(SDH-1) source line board. See Figure 3-15. You can select different
source boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-16, the total capacity of the service

Timeslot is 1xSTM-1 according to the plan. Hence, Source Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 In this example, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used as the sink
(SDH-1) line board. See Figure 3-15. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink Timeslot 1 As shown in Figure 3-16, the total capacity of the service
Range(e.g. is 1xSTM-1 according to the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot
1,3-6) Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure the pass-through services of NE2.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

3-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the E1 service is configured on the ring.

Hence, Level of the E1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the E1 service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used as the
(SDH-1) source line board. See Figure 3-15. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-16, the total capacity of the

Timeslot service is 1xSTM-1 according to the plan. Hence,
Range(e.g. Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as the
(SDH-1) sink line board. See Figure 3-15. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-16, the total capacity of the

Timeslot service is 1xSTM-1 according to the plan. Hence, Sink
Range(e.g. Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-45

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.10 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring

Compared with the services on an MSP ring, the services on an SNCP ring have dedicated
physical paths as the protection paths. In addition, the services on the SNCP ring are dually fed
and selectively received. When you configure services on the SNCP ring, you need not configure
the protection subnet and the services separately, but you need to configure the working services
and protection services separately.
3.10.1 Networking Diagram
The creation of an SNCP ring network is similar to the creation of an MSP ring network. For
example, the MSP and SNCP rings are constructed based on two fibers and their services must
pass through the intermediate nodes for transmission from the source NE to the sink NE. The
difference is that the SNCP and SNCP services can be created on the T2000 at a time.
3.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
Similar to the service configuration of an MSP ring, you need to plan certain traffic directions
before configuring the services on an SNCP ring, if multiple service routes are available from
the source end to the sink end. During the timeslot allocation of the services on the SNCP ring,
allocate timeslots for source slots, which include the source timeslots of the working service and
the source timeslots of the protection service.
3.10.3 Configuration Process
The SNCP function and the services on the SNCP ring are configured on the T2000 at a time.
To configure the SNCP services on the source and sink NEs, you need to determine the source
slots and timeslots for the working service and the protection service. In addition, you need to
configure pass-through services on the intermediate nodes.

3.10.1 Networking Diagram

The creation of an SNCP ring network is similar to the creation of an MSP ring network. For
example, the MSP and SNCP rings are constructed based on two fibers and their services must
pass through the intermediate nodes for transmission from the source NE to the sink NE. The
difference is that the SNCP and SNCP services can be created on the T2000 at a time.
Figure 3-18 shows an SNCP ring that consists of four pieces of MSTP equipment. In this
example, the JL16 boards are used on the source NE (NE1) and the sink NE (NE3) to add and
drop services and the JL64 boards are used on the source NE (NE1) and the sink NE (NE3) to
transmit SDH services.

3-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Figure 3-18 Networking diagram of the SNCP ring

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
Line board 1-JL64 SNCP ring Line board 1-JL64
NE2 NE4 Line board 17-JL64
Line board 17-JL64
17 1

NE3
18 17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

Similar to the service configuration of an MSP ring, you need to plan certain traffic directions
before configuring the services on an SNCP ring, if multiple service routes are available from
the source end to the sink end. During the timeslot allocation of the services on the SNCP ring,
allocate timeslots for source slots, which include the source timeslots of the working service and
the source timeslots of the protection service.
Figure 3-19 shows the service signal flow of the services on the SNCP ring and the timeslot
allocation to the services on the SNCP ring. In the actual configuration, you can plan other proper
working paths and protection paths according to the requirements. In this example, the working
service route is NE1-NE2-NE3 and the protection service route is NE1-NE4-NE3. There is one
STM-1 service.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-47

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-19 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1xSTM-1 NE1:
SNCP Protection Service
Group Working Source Protection Source
Sink
Protection group 1 18-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL16

VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE1 NE2 and NE4:
SDH Service Service
Service Source
Sink
VC-4 1-JL64 17-JL64
1 17
VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1
Service pass-through NE2 SNCP ring NE4 Service pass-through

17 1

18 NE3 17

VC4:VC4-1
NE3:
SNCP Protection Protection
Group Working Source Service Sink
Source
Flow of the working 1xSTM-1 Protection group 1 18-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL16
STM-16 line board
service

Flow of the
protection service STM-64 line board

3.10.3 Configuration Process

The SNCP function and the services on the SNCP ring are configured on the T2000 at a time.
To configure the SNCP services on the source and sink NEs, you need to determine the source
slots and timeslots for the working service and the protection service. In addition, you need to
configure pass-through services on the intermediate nodes.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be familiar with 3.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane. In the Create SNCP Service dialog
box that is displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

3-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in This Description

Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, Service Type adopts the default
value, namely, SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured

on the ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to
VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and

received on the same path. That is, the service is
a bidirectional service. Hence, Direction of the
service is set to Bidirectional.

Revertive Mode Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

switched back after the faulty line is recovered,
that is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 It is recommended that this parameter adopts the

(100ms) default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is recovered and the
normal state lasts for 600s, the switching
recovery occurs. This parameter is valid only
when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Worki Source 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-18, the JL64 board in slot
ng Slot (SDH-1) 18 is used as the source board for the working
Servic service. You can select different source boards
e for the working service depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-19, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.
(e.g. 1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-19, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
(e.g. set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-18, the JL16 board in slot
(SDH-1) 1 is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-49

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in This Description

Example

Protec Source 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-18, the JL64 board in slot
tion Slot (SDH-1) 17 is used as the source board for the protection
Servic service. You can select different source boards
e for the protection service depending on the
actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-19, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.
(e.g. 1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE3). Refer to Step 1 to configure the SDH services
on NE3. The method and parameters for configuring the SDH services on NE3 are the same as
the method and parameters for configuring the SDH services on NE1.
Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE2.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service. Hence, Direction of the service is set to
Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-18, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-19, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Hence, Source
Range(e.g. Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-18, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

3-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-19, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Hence, Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g. Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Configure pass-through services on NE4. Refer to Step 3 to configure the pass-through services
on NE4. The method and parameters for configuring the pass-through services on NE4 are the
same as the method and parameters for configuring the pass-through services on NE2.
Step 5 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 7 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.11 Configuring Services on the SNCP Ring with a Non-

Protection Chain
To configure the services on the SNCP ring, you can configure the working service and the
protection service directly, without creating the protection subnet. To configure the services on
the non-protection chain, you need to configure the services only after the protection subnet is
created.

3.11.1 Networking Diagram

The networking of the SNCP ring in the case of configuring the services on the SNCP ring with
a non-protection chain is similar to the networking in the case of configuring the services on the

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-51

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

SNCP ring. The services from the SNCP ring to the non-protection chain pass through the
intersecting node and are added to or dropped from the NE on the non-protection chain.
3.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain, you need to plan certain
traffic directions for the services on the SNCP ring and the services on the non-protection chain.
During the timeslot allocation of the services on the SNCP ring, allocate timeslots for source
slots, which include the source timeslots of the working service and the source timeslots of the
protection service.
3.11.3 Configuration Process
Before you configure services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain, familiarize yourself
with the information about the source slot, sink slot, and their corresponding timeslots of the
working service and the protection service on the source and sink NEs on the SNCP ring. In
addition, you need to configure pass-through services on the intermediate NEs.

3.11.1 Networking Diagram

The networking of the SNCP ring in the case of configuring the services on the SNCP ring with
a non-protection chain is similar to the networking in the case of configuring the services on the
SNCP ring. The services from the SNCP ring to the non-protection chain pass through the
intersecting node and are added to or dropped from the NE on the non-protection chain.

Figure 3-20 shows the networking diagram of the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain. The
SNCP ring consists of five pieces of equipment.

In this example, one STM-1 service is configured between NE3 and NE5. The JL16 boards are
used on the source NE (NE3) and the sink NE (NE5) to add and drop services and the JL64
boards are used on the source NE (NE3) and the sink NE (NE5) to transmit SDH services.

Figure 3-20 Networking diagram of the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64

1 17
NE1
Non-protection NE5
17 1 chain
Line board 1-JL64 Line board 1-JL16
NE2 SNCP ring NE4
Line board 17-JL64 Line board 17-JL64
1 17 18 17

NE3 Line board 1-JL64

17 18 Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain, you need to plan certain
traffic directions for the services on the SNCP ring and the services on the non-protection chain.
During the timeslot allocation of the services on the SNCP ring, allocate timeslots for source
slots, which include the source timeslots of the working service and the source timeslots of the
protection service.

3-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Figure 3-21 shows the signal flow of the services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain
and the timeslot allocation to the services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain. In this
example, the STM-1 service is configured between NE3 and NE5.
In this example, the traffic direction of the services on the SNCP ring, is configured as follows:
l Traffic direction of the working service from NE3 to NE4: NE3→NE4
l Traffic direction of the protection service from NE3 to NE4: NE3→NE2→NE1→NE4
l Traffic direction of the working service from NE4 to NE3: NE4→NE1→NE2→NE3
l Traffic direction of the protection service from NE4 to NE3: NE4→NE3
In the actual configuration, you can plan other working paths and protection paths according to
the requirements.

Figure 3-21 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE1: VC4: VC4-1 Service pass-through
SDH Service Service Source Service Source

VC-4 17-JL64 1-JL64

NE4:
1 11 SNCP Protection
NE2: VC4: VC4-1 Service pass-through NE1 Group
Workin g Source Protection Source Service Sink
Protection group 1 17-JL64 1-JL64 18-JL64
SDH Service Service Source Service Sink

VC-4 17-JL64 1-JL16

17 1 VC4: VC4-1

SNCP ring NE 1xSTM-1

NE2
4 18 17
Non-protection chain
1 17 VC4: VC4-1 NE5
SDH Service Service Source Service Sink
VC-4 17-JL64 1-JL16
17 NE3 18

VC4: VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1

NE3:
SNCP Protection
Group Working Source Protection Source Service Sink

STM-16 line board 1xSTM-1

Flow of the working Protection group 1 17-JL64 18-JL64 1-JL16
service
Flow of the protection
service STM-64 line board
Traffic flow on the non-
protection chain

3.11.3 Configuration Process

Before you configure services on the SNCP ring with a non-protection chain, familiarize yourself
with the information about the source slot, sink slot, and their corresponding timeslots of the
working service and the protection service on the source and sink NEs on the SNCP ring. In
addition, you need to configure pass-through services on the intermediate NEs.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.1 Configuring a Non-Protection
Chain.
l You must be familiar with 3.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-53

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE3).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane. In the Create SNCP Service dialog
box that is displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, Service Type is set to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive When an NE is in the switching state, the NE is

recovered from the switching state to the normal
state a period of time after the working path is
recovered.

Direction Bidirection In this example, the cross-connections are created

al in the SNCP receive direction and in the SNCP
transmit direction.

Hold-off Time 0 It is recommended that this parameter adopts the

(100ms) default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is recovered and the normal
state lasts for 600s, the switching recovery occurs.
This parameter is valid only when Revertive
Mode is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot
king (SDH-1) 17 of NE3 is used as the source board for the
Ser working service.
vice
Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured
Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the working
Range(e.g. service source occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL16 board in slot
(SDH-1) 1 of NE3 is used as the sink board for the working
service.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g. between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the working
1,3-6) service sink occupies the first VC-4.

Prot Source Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL16 board in slot
ecti (SDH-1) 18 of NE3 is used as the source board for the
on protection service.

3-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Ser Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

vice Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the protection
Range(e.g. service source occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE4).

1. In the NE Explorer, click , and then select NE4. Click OK.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane. In the Create SNCP Service dialog
box that is displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, Service Type is set to SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Revertive Mode Revertive When an NE is in the switching state, the NE is

recovered from the switching state to the normal
state a period of time after the working path is
recovered.

Direction Bidirection The cross-connections are created in the SNCP

al receive direction and in the SNCP transmit
direction.

Hold-off Time 0 It is recommended that this parameter adopts the

(100ms) default value.

WTR Time(s) 600 After the working path is recovered and the
normal state lasts for 600s, the switching recovery
occurs. This parameter is valid only when the
Revertive Mode parameter is set to Revertive.

Wor Source Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot
king (SDH-1) 17 of NE4 is used as the source board for the
Ser working service.
vice
Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured
Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the working
Range(e.g. service source occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-55

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot
(SDH-1) 18 of NE4 is used as the sink board for the working
service. This can implement the pass-through of
the service when the service needs to be
transmitted out of the SNCP ring.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g. between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the working
1,3-6) service sink occupies the first VC-4.

Prot Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL16 board in slot
ecti (SDH-1) 1 of NE3 is used as the source board for the
on protection service.
Ser
vice Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured
Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the protection
Range(e.g. service source occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE2.

1. In the NE Explorer, click , and then select NE2. Click OK.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, Direction of the service is set to

l Bidirectional.

Source Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE2 is used as the source line board.

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the working service
Range(e.g. source occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot 1 of
(SDH-1) NE2 is used as the sink line board.

3-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service sink occupies
Range(e.g. the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Configure pass-through services on NE1. Refer to Step 3 to configure the SDH services on NE1.
The method and parameters for configuring the pass-through services of NE1 are the same as
the method and parameters for configuring the pass-through services on NE2.

Step 5 Configure services on the non-protection chain on NE5.

1. In the NE Explorer, click , and then select NE5. Click OK.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
3. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, Direction of the service is set to

l Bidirectional.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot 1 of
(SDH-1) NE5 is used as the source board.

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the working service
Range(e.g. source occupies the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-20, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE5 is used as the sink line board.

Sink 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service sink occupies
Range(e.g. the first VC-4.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-57

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Step 6 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.

Step 7 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 8 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.12 Configuring Services on the MSP Ring with a Non-

Protection Chain
Configure the protection subnet for the MSP, protection subnet for the non-protection chain, and
services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain separately. It is recommended that you
configure the protection subnets before configuring the services on the MSP ring with a non-
protection chain.

3.12.1 Networking Diagram

In the case of the MSP ring with a non-protection chain, the networking diagram of the MSP
ring is similar to the networking diagram of the single two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. The
only difference is that one line board needs to be configured on the intersecting NE when the
non-protection chain is added. This can realize the pass-through of the services when the services
nee to be transmitted out of the MSP ring.
3.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
To configure the services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain, you should plan certain
traffic directions and timeslot allocation schemes for the services on the MSP ring and the
services on the non-protection chain.
3.12.3 Configuration Process
The configuration of the services on the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection
chain is independent of the creation of the protection subnets for the MSP and for the non-
protection chain. To configure the services on the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-
protection chain, configure SDH services between lines on the source and sink NEs and pass-
through services on the intermediate NEs, if the protection subnets are already created.

3-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

3.12.1 Networking Diagram

In the case of the MSP ring with a non-protection chain, the networking diagram of the MSP
ring is similar to the networking diagram of the single two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. The
only difference is that one line board needs to be configured on the intersecting NE when the
non-protection chain is added. This can realize the pass-through of the services when the services
nee to be transmitted out of the MSP ring.
Figure 3-22 shows the networking diagram of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-
protection chain. The MSP ring consists of five pieces of equipment. In this example, the JL16
boards are used on the source NE (NE3) and the sink NE (NE5) to add and drop services and
the JL64 boards are used on the source NE (NE3) and the sink NE (NE5) to transmit SDH
services.

Figure 3-22 Networking diagram of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection
chain
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64

1 17
NE1
Non-protection chain NE5
17 1
Line board 1-JL64 Line board 1-JL16
NE2 Two-fiber bidirectional NE4
Line board 17-JL64 MSP ring Line board 17-JL64
1 17 18 17

NE3 Line board 1-JL64

17 18 Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

To configure the services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain, you should plan certain
traffic directions and timeslot allocation schemes for the services on the MSP ring and the
services on the non-protection chain.
Figure 3-23 shows the signal flow of the services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain
and the timeslot allocation to the services on the MSP ring with a non-protection chain. In this
example, the STM-1 service is added to or dropped from NE3 and NE5, and then passes through
NE4.
On the MSP ring, the services from NE3 to NE4 in this example are transmitted on the short
path. In the actual configuration, you can plan other service paths according to the requirements.

NOTE

On the ring network, the long path and the short path do not actually refer to the geographical distance.
They are determined by the number of intermediate NEs. As shown in Figure 3-23, when the service is
transmitted from NE3 to NE4, NE3→NE4 is the short path, and NE3→NE2→NE1→NE4 is the long path.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-59

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-23 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1 17
NE1 NE4:
Line Board Line Board
17-JL64 18-JL64
17 1

NE2 MSP ring NE4 1xSTM-1

18 17
1 17 Non-protection chain
NE5:
VC4: VC4-1
Line Board Line Board
NE3 17-JL64 1-JL16
17 18

VC4: VC4-1

NE3:
STM-16 line board Line Board Line Board
1xSTM-1 18-JL64 1-JL16
STM-64 line board

Traffic flow on the MSP ring

Traffic flow on the non-protection chain

3.12.3 Configuration Process

The configuration of the services on the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-protection
chain is independent of the creation of the protection subnets for the MSP and for the non-
protection chain. To configure the services on the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring with a non-
protection chain, configure SDH services between lines on the source and sink NEs and pass-
through services on the intermediate NEs, if the protection subnets are already created.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The created protection subnet must be consistent with the actual network topology. For
details about how to create the protection subnet, see 2.7.1 Configuring a Non-Protection
Chain and 2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.12.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE3).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

3-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-22, the JL64 board in slot 1 of
(SDH-1) NE3 is used as the source board.

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot Range between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service source
(e.g.1,3-6) occupies the first VC-4 timeslot.

Sink Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-22, the JL64 board in slot 18 of
(SDH-1) NE3 is used as the sink line board.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g. between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service sink
1,3-6) occupies the first VC-4.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Refer to Step 1 to configure SDH services on the sink NE (NE5). Set the required parameters.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured. Hence,

Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and received

on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-22, the JL64 board in slot 1 of NE5
(SDH-1) is used as the source board.

Source Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g.1,3-6) between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service source
occupies the first VC-4.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-22, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE5 is used as the sink line board.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g.1,3-6) between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service sink occupies
the first VC-4.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-61

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE4.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-22, the JL64 board in slot 17 of
(SDH-1) NE4 is used as the source line board.

Source 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot Range between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service source
(e.g.1,3-6) occupies the first VC-4 timeslot.

Sink Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-22, the JL64 board in slot 18 of
(SDH-1) NE4 is used as the sink line board.

Sink Timeslot 1 In this example, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g. between NE3 and NE5. Hence, the service sink
1,3-6) occupies the first VC-4.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

3-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.13 Configuring Services on the MSP Tangent Rings

The utilization of service timeslots on each MSP tangent ring at the tangent NE is high, and the
network structure is cost-efficient and practical. Hence, the MSP tangent ring is widely used on
the SDH network. To construct the MSP tangent rings, you need to connect two physical ring
networks through one NE (namely, the tangent NE). With respect to service configuration, the
MSP tangent ring has no great difference from the MSP tangent ring of the single ring network.
You need to configure a bidirectional path service on the tangent node where the service enters
the sink ring network from the source ring network.
3.13.1 Networking Diagram
To construct the MSP tangent rings, you should connect two physical ring networks through one
NE (namely, the tangent NE) and configure the bidirectional service on this tangent NE.
3.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The timeslot allocation of the MSP tangent ring is similar to the timeslot allocation of a single
MSP ring. The service can be transmitted in multiple paths, and thus the traffic direction is based
on the configuration of the service source board and sink board on the tangent NE.
3.13.3 Configuration Process
The service configuration of the MSP tangent rings equals to the configuration of services in
two single MSP rings. You only need to configure the bidirectional path services of two ring
networks on the tangent node.

3.13.1 Networking Diagram

To construct the MSP tangent rings, you should connect two physical ring networks through one
NE (namely, the tangent NE) and configure the bidirectional service on this tangent NE.
Figure 3-24 shows two MSP tangent rings that consist of seven pieces of MSTP equipment.
NE3 functions as the tangent NE. The JL16 boards are used on the source NE (NE1) and the
sink NE (NE6) to add and drop services and the JL64 boards are used on the source NE (NE1)
and the sink NE (NE6) as line boards to transmit SDH services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-63

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Figure 3-24 Networking diagram of the MSP tangent ring

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64 NE2 MSP ring 1 NE4
17 1
NE3
Line board 1-JL64
1 17 Line board 2-JL64
2 Line board 17-JL64
18
Line board 18-JL64

17 17
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64 NE5 MSP ring 2 NE7
1 1

NE6
17 18

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The timeslot allocation of the MSP tangent ring is similar to the timeslot allocation of a single
MSP ring. The service can be transmitted in multiple paths, and thus the traffic direction is based
on the configuration of the service source board and sink board on the tangent NE.
Figure 3-25 shows the signal flow of the services on the MSP tangent rings and the timeslot
allocation to the services on the MSP tangent rings. The service can be transmitted in the MSP
tangent rings in different directions and paths. In this example, the service on the ring is
transmitted to the ring network from NE1 and then is dropped on the sink NE (NE6). On the
tangent NE (NE3), the bidirectional service from the line board in slot 1 to the line board in slot
2 is configured. The traffic direction is NE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-NE6. There is one STM-1 service
on the ring.

3-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Figure 3-25 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE1:
1xSTM-1 Line Board Line Board
1-JL16 17-JL64

VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE2: NE1
Line Board Line Board
1-JL64 17-JL64 1 17
VC4: VC4-1
Serice pass-through NE2 MSP ring 1 NE4

17 1

NE3
1 17

NE3:
Line Board Line Board VC4: VC4-1
1-JL64 2-JL64

2 18

17 17
VC4: VC4-1
MSP ring 2
Service pass-through NE5 NE7

NE5:
1 1
Line Board Line Board
1-JL64 17-JL64
17 NE6 18

VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

NE6:
Line Board Line Board
1xSTM-1
1-JL16 17-JL64
Flow of the
STM-16 line board
working service
STM-64 line board

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-65

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.13.3 Configuration Process

The service configuration of the MSP tangent rings equals to the configuration of services in
two single MSP rings. You only need to configure the bidirectional path services of two ring
networks on the tangent node.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The protection subnets of the two tangent rings must be created and consistent with the
actual network topology. For details about how to create the protection subnets, see 2.7.3
Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Precautions
As shown in 3.13.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation, the traffic direction on the ring is
considered as NE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-NE6. In the actual configuration, you can use another
configuration according to the requirements. You must ensure that service is transmitted to the
local MSP ring on the source NE and then is transmitted to the another MSP ring through the
tangent NE. Finally, the service must be dropped from the sink NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

3-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE6). Refer to Step 1 to configure the SDH services
on NE6. Set the required parameters.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured on the

ring. Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and received on

the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is configured

Timeslot according to the plan. Level is set to VC4. Hence, Source
Range(e.g. Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board. You can select different sink boards
depending on the actual situation.

Sink Timeslot 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is configured

Range(e.g. according to the plan. Level is set to VC4. Hence, Sink
1,3-6) Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 3 Configure pass-through services on NE2.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-67

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 4 Configure pass-through services on NE5. Refer to Step 3 to configure the SDH services on NE5.
The method and parameters for configuring the SDH services on NE5 are the same as the method
and parameters for configuring the SDH services on NE2.
Step 5 Configure the SDH services of the tangent NE (NE3).
NOTE

The tangent NE of two MSP tangent rings needs to be configured with only one bidirectional path service
so that the services on the two MSP rings communicate with each other. The service protection still
depending on the protection of the two MSP rings for their own services.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

3-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-24, the JL64 board in slot 2 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-25, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 6 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 7 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 8 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-69

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.14 Configuring Services on the MSP Intersecting Rings

Configuring services on the MSP intersecting rings is complex. The capacity of inter-ring
services is low. The protection mechanism, however, is complete. When a fiber is cut on two
MSP intersecting or tangent rings, the service protection is implemented. In addition, the MSP
intersecting rings can implement service protection when an intersecting NE fails. Hence, the
MSP intersecting rings are applicable to the scenarios where the services need to be protected
when one intersecting node fails.
3.14.1 Networking Diagram
To construct two MSP intersecting rings, you need to connect two physical ring networks through
two NEs (namely, the intersecting NEs) and choose one intersecting NE as the working
intersecting NE. In addition, all inter-ring services of the two MSP rings must pass through the
working intersecting node. In this case, the services can be protected when the working
intersecting node is faulty.
3.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
On the MSP intersecting ring, the timeslot allocation of services on non-intersecting nodes is
the same as the timeslot allocation of services on a single MSP ring. You need to focus on the
service configuration on the working intersecting node (NE3).
3.14.3 Configuration Process
To configure the MSP intersecting ring service, you must configure the pass-through service at
two intersecting nodes for two SNCP protection groups and protection paths of the working node
(NE3). The configuration of the services on other non-intersecting NEs is the same as the
configuration of the services on the MSP tangent rings.

3.14.1 Networking Diagram

To construct two MSP intersecting rings, you need to connect two physical ring networks through
two NEs (namely, the intersecting NEs) and choose one intersecting NE as the working
intersecting NE. In addition, all inter-ring services of the two MSP rings must pass through the
working intersecting node. In this case, the services can be protected when the working
intersecting node is faulty.
Figure 3-26 shows two MSP intersecting rings that consist of eight pieces of MSTP equipment.
NE3 functions as the working intersecting NE. NE8 functions as the other intersecting NE. In
this example, one STM-1 service is added to the ring from the source NE (NE1) and dropped
from the sink NE (NE6). The JL16 boards are used on NE1 and NE6 to add and drop services.
The JL64 boards are used on all NEs to transmit SDH services.

3-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Figure 3-26 Networking diagram of the MSP intersecting rings

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
Line board 1-JL64
Line board NE2 MSP ring 1 NE4
17-JL64
17 1
NE3 NE8
1 17 1 17 Line board 1-JL64
Line board 2-JL64
2 18 2 18 Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 17
Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64 NE5 MSP ring 2 NE7
1 1

NE6
17 18

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

On the MSP intersecting ring, the timeslot allocation of services on non-intersecting nodes is
the same as the timeslot allocation of services on a single MSP ring. You need to focus on the
service configuration on the working intersecting node (NE3).
Figure 3-27 shows the signal flow of the services on the MSP intersecting rings and the timeslot
allocation to the services on the MSP intersecting rings.
l On the working node (NE3), you need to configure two SNCP protection groups. Normally,
the traffic direction of the selected working path is
NE1←→NE2←→NE3←→NE5←→NE6, which is consistent with the traffic direction
on the MSP tangent rings.
– When the service travels to MSP ring 2 from the MSP ring 1, SNCP protection group
1 selectively receives the service.
– When the service travels to MSP ring 1 from MSP ring 2, SNCP protection group 2
selectively receives the service.
l On NE3, configure the pass-through service in the fist VC-4, from the board in slot 1 to
the board in slot 17. On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the fist VC-4, from the
board in slot 1 to the board in slot 2. This pass-through service functions as the protection
sources of SNCP protection group 1 on NE3.
l On NE3, configure the pass-through service in the fist VC-4, from the board in slot 2 to
the board in slot 18. On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the fist VC-4, from the

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-71

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

board in slot 2 to the board in slot 1. This pass-through service functions as the protection
sources of SNCP protection group 2 on NE3.

Both the MSP intersecting rings and MSP tangent rings can implement protection for the services
when a fiber is cut on each SNCP ring. Only the MSP intersecting rings, however, can protect
the services when one intersecting node fails.

Figure 3-27 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1xSTM-1

NE1:
Line Board Line Board
VC4: VC4-1
1-JL16 17-JL64

17 18
NE1

17
1
VC4: VC4-1
NE2 MSP ring 1 NE4
Service pass-through
17
1

NE3: VC4: VC4-1

Unidirectional
Service Source Service Sink
Cross-Connection

1 17
NE3 17
Cross-Connection 1 1-JL64 17-JL64
1
Cross-Connection 2
NE8
2-JL64 18-JL64

SNCP Protection
Service Sink Working Source Protection Source
Group VC4: VC4-1
Protection group 1 2-JL64 1-JL64 18-JL64
Service pass-through
Protection group 2 1-JL64 2-JL64 17-JL64

2 18 2 18

17 17

VC4: VC4-1 NE5 NE7

MSP ring 2
Service pass-through
1
1

17 NE6
18

VC4: VC4-1
NE6:
Line Board Line Board
Working path STM-16 line board 1xSTM-1
1-JL16 17-JL64
Protection path STM-64 line board

3.14.3 Configuration Process

To configure the MSP intersecting ring service, you must configure the pass-through service at
two intersecting nodes for two SNCP protection groups and protection paths of the working node

3-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

(NE3). The configuration of the services on other non-intersecting NEs is the same as the
configuration of the services on the MSP tangent rings.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l The protection subnets of the two intersecting rings must be created and consistent with
the actual network topology. For details about how to create the protection subnets, see
2.7.3 Creating an MS Ring Protection Subnet.
l You must be familiar with 3.14.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 See Step 1 to Step 4 of 3.13.3 Configuration Process to configure services on NE1, NE2, NE5,
and NE6.
Step 2 Configure services from MSP ring 1 to MSP ring 2 on the intersecting NE (NE3).
1. Configure pass-through services from the board in slot 1 to the board in slot 17 on NE3.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the SL16 board in slot 11
(SDH-1) is used as the source line board. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 17 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different
sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-73

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
1,3-6) to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

2. Configure SNCP group 1 according to the plan on the SNCP group on NE3, which is shown
in Figure 3-27.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane. In the Create SNCP Service
dialog box that is displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and

nal received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is available. Hence, Hold-off Time(100ms) need
not be specified. During the service configuration,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 1
ing e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the working service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce working service depending on the actual situation.

3-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. Level is set to
lot VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Prote Sourc 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 18
ction e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the protection service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce protection service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 2
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

CAUTION
It is recommended that you set Hold-off Time(100ms) to a value that is longer than the
maximum MSP switching time (50 ms). If Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0, the SNCP
and the MSP may perform the unnecessary switching again after a fiber between NE2 and
NE3 is interrupted.

Step 3 Configure the services from MSP ring 2 to MSP ring 1 on the intersecting NE (NE3).
1. Configure pass-through services from the board in slot 2 to the board in slot 18 on NE3.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-75

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

l Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Source Slot 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 2 is
(SDH-1) used as the source line board. You can select different
source boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Sink Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 18 is
(SDH-1) used as the sink line board. You can select different
sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
1,3-6) to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

2. Configure SNCP group 2 according to the plan on the SNCP group on NE3, which is shown
in Figure 3-27.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane. In the Create SNCP Service
dialog box that is displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

3-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and

nal received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is available. Hence, Hold-off Time(100ms) need
not be specified. During the service configuration,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 2
ing e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the working service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce working service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. Level is set to
lot VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Prote Sourc 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 17
ction e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the protection service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce protection service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-77

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 1
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

CAUTION
It is recommended that you set Hold-off Time(100ms) to a value that is longer than the
maximum MSP switching time (50 ms). If Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0, the SNCP
and the MSP may perform the unnecessary switching again after a fiber between NE2 and
NE3 is interrupted.

Step 4 Configure pass-through services of MSP ring 1 and MSP ring 2 on NE8.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE8 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used
(SDH-1) as the source line board. You can select different source
boards depending on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-26, the JL64 board in slot 2 is used
(SDH-1) as the sink line board. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

3-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-27, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to VC4.
Range(e.g. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediately

Step 5 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 7 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly, and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

3.15 Configuring Services on the SNCP Tangent Rings

With respect to the physical topology, the SNCP tangent rings are similar to the MSP tangent
rings. In the case of the SNCP tangent rings, the services can be protected when one fiber section
is cut on either SNCP ring. The service configuration on the tangent NE is crucial in the service
configuration on the SNCP tangent rings. Each bidirectional service that passes by the tangent
NE must be configured with four pairs of protection groups.
3.15.1 Networking Diagram
The SNCP tangent rings are similar to the MSP tangent rings, with respect to the physical
networking topology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional
services on the tangent point in the case of MSP tangent rings. In the case of the SNCP ring,
however, you need to configure four protection groups for each pair of bidirectional services.
3.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The services on the SNCP tangent rings are not transmitted in a fixed direction. The traffic flow
depends on how to choose and configure the working path and the protection path of the service

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-79

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

on each NE where the SNCP protection group is configured. When configuring the SNCP
protection group on the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each
bidirectional service at the tangent point. The method of allocating timeslots for the services on
the SNCP tangent rings is the same as the method of allocating timeslots for the services on a
single SNCP ring.
3.15.3 Configuration Process
The method of configuring services on the SNCP tangent rings (except for the tangent NE) is
the same as the method of configuring SNCP services on a single ring network. On the tangent
NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectional service.

3.15.1 Networking Diagram

The SNCP tangent rings are similar to the MSP tangent rings, with respect to the physical
networking topology. The difference is that you need to configure only one pair of bidirectional
services on the tangent point in the case of MSP tangent rings. In the case of the SNCP ring,
however, you need to configure four protection groups for each pair of bidirectional services.

In the networking diagram shown in Figure 3-28, seven pieces of MSTP equipment construct
two SNCP tangent rings and the tangent NE is NE3. The JL16 boards are used on the source NE
(NE1) and sink NE (NE6) to add and drop services and the JL64 boards are used on the source
NE (NE1) and sink NE (NE6) to transmit SDH services.

Figure 3-28 Networking diagram of the SNCP tangent rings

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

Line board 1-JL64 17 18 Line board 1-JL64

NE1
Line board 17-JL64 Line board 17-JL64
1 17
NE2 SNCP ring 1 NE4
17 1
NE3 Line board 1-JL64
1 17 Line board 2-JL64
2 Line board 17-JL64
18 Line board 18-JL64

1 17
NE5 SNCP ring 2 NE7
17 1
Line board 1-JL64 Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64 NE6 Line board 17-JL64
18 17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

3.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The services on the SNCP tangent rings are not transmitted in a fixed direction. The traffic flow
depends on how to choose and configure the working path and the protection path of the service
on each NE where the SNCP protection group is configured. When configuring the SNCP
protection group on the tangent NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each
bidirectional service at the tangent point. The method of allocating timeslots for the services on
the SNCP tangent rings is the same as the method of allocating timeslots for the services on a
single SNCP ring.

Figure 3-29 shows the service signal flow and timeslot allocation. The services can be
transmitted on different routes and in different directions, on the SNCP tangent rings. In this
example, the services are accessed to the ring network from NE1 and then are dropped from the
sink NE (NE6). On the tangent NE (NE3), four SNCP protection groups need to be configured.
The traffic direction is NE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-NE6 or NE1-NE2-NE7-NE6. The capacity of the
services on the ring network is 1xSTM-1.

Figure 3-29 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE1:
1xSTM-1 SNCP Protection Service
Group Working Source Protection Source
Sink
Protection group 1 18-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL16

VC4: VC4-1
VC4: VC4-1

17 18
NE1
NE2 and NE4:
SDH Service Service Source Service Source

1 17 VC-4 1-JL64 17-JL64

VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

NE2 SNCP ring 1 NE4 Service pass-through
Service pass-through

17 1

NE3:
1 NE3 17 SNCP Protection Working Source
SNCP Group
Protection Source Service Sink

Protection group 1 18-JL64 2-JL64 1-JL64

Protection group 2 18-JL64 2-JL64 17-JL64

VC4:VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1
Protection group 3 1-JL64 17-JL64 18-JL64

Protection group 4 1-JL64 17-JL64 2-JL64

2 18

1 17

VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

SNCP ring 2
Service pass-through NE5 NE7 Service pass-through

17 1

18 NE6 17

VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1

NE6:
SNCP Protection
Service
Group Working Source Protection Source
1xSTM-1 Sink
Protection Group 1 18-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL16
Flow of the
working service STM-16 line board

Flow of the STM-64 line board

protection service

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-81

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.15.3 Configuration Process

The method of configuring services on the SNCP tangent rings (except for the tangent NE) is
the same as the method of configuring SNCP services on a single ring network. On the tangent
NE, you need to configure four SNCP protection groups for each bidirectional service.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be familiar with 3.15.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SDH services of the source NE (NE1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane to display the Create SNCP
Service dialog box. Set the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Click Close
in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, Service Type adopts the default
value, namely, SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirection In this example, the service is transmitted and received

al on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that is,
whether the switching is revertive or non-revertive. In
this example, Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is used. Hence, you need not set a specific hold-off
time. In this example, set Hold-off Time(100ms) to
0 when configuring services.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Worki Sourc 18-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used as
ng e Slot (SDH-1) the source line board of the working service. See
Servic Figure 3-28. You can select different source boards
e depending on the actual situation.

3-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. In this example,
Times Level is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range
lot (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. In this example,
lot Level is set to VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.
Range 1,3-6) is set to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Protec Sourc 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as
tion e Slot (SDH-1) the source board of the protection service. See Figure
Servic 3-28. You can select different source boards depending
e on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. In this example,
Times Level is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range
lot (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 In this example, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used as the
(SDH-1) sink line board. See Figure 3-28. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Step 2 Configure the SDH services of the sink NE (NE6). Refer to Step 1 and configure the SDH
services of NE6. Set the parameters as follows.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, Service Type adopts the default value,
namely, SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured. Hence,

Level of the STM-1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and received on

the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-83

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Revertive Mode Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is switched
back after the faulty line is recovered, that is, whether the
switching is revertive or non-revertive. In this example,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode is

(100ms) used. Hence, you need not set a specific hold-off time. In
this example, set Hold-off Time(100ms) to 0 when
configuring services.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value 600.

Worki Source 18-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used as the
ng Slot (SDH-1) source line board of the working service. See Figure
Servic 3-28. You can select different source boards depending
e on the actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timesl configured according to the plan. In this example, Level
ot is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.
Range 1,3-6) is set to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timesl configured according to the plan. In this example, Level
ot is set to VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
Range set to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Protec Source 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as the
tion Slot (SDH-1) source board of the protection service. See Figure 3-28.
Servic You can select different source boards depending on the
e actual situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timesl configured according to the plan. In this example, Level
ot is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.
Range 1,3-6) is set to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL16-1 In this example, the JL16 board in slot 1 is used as the sink
(SDH-1) line board. See Figure 3-28. You can select different sink
boards depending on the actual situation.

Step 3 Configure the pass-through services of NE2.

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

3-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

2. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required. and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the STM-1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirectiona In this example, the service is transmitted and received

l on the same path. That is, the service is a bidirectional
service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used as the
(SDH-1) source line board. See Figure 3-28. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. In this example,
Range(e.g. Level is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range
1,3-6) (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as the
(SDH-1) sink board. See Figure 3-28. You can select different
sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. In this example,
Range(e.g. Level is set to VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.
1,3-6) 1,3-6) is set to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

NOTE

In this example, NE4, NE5, and NE7 are pass-through NEs. The method of configuring the services
of NE4, NE5, and NE7 is the same as the method of configuring the service of NE2. Refer to Step
3a to Step 3b.

Step 4 Configure the SDH services of the tangent NE (NE3).

NOTE

According to the configuration principle of the SNCP tangent rings, you need to configure four SNCP
protection groups for each bidirectional service. The configuration combination of protection groups is not
fixed. You can configure the protection group according to actual requirements. The following
configuration is provided as reference only.
1. See Figure 3-29 to configure protection group 1 according to the plan of the protection
group on NE3.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-85

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

l Click Create SNCP Service in the lower right portion of the window. Select Configure
SNCP Tangent Ring on the lower right of the Create SNCP Service dialog box that is
displayed and set the required parameters.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, Service Type adopts the default
value, namely, SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the STM-1 service is set to VC4.

Direction Bidirection In this example, the service is transmitted and

al received on the same path. That is, the service is a
bidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. In this example, Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is used. Hence, you need not set a specific hold-off
time. In this example, set Hold-off Time(100ms) to
0 when configuring services.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 18-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used as
ing e Slot (SDH-1) the source line board of the working service. See
Servi Figure 3-28. You can select different source boards
ce depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. In this example,
Times Level is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range
lot (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used as

Slot (SDH-1) the sink line board. See Figure 3-28. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. In this example,
lot Level is set to VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range
Range (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

3-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Prote Sourc 2-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 2 is used as
ction e Slot (SDH-1) the source board of the protection service. See
Servi Figure 3-28. You can select different source boards
ce depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. In this example,
Times Level is set to VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range
lot (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as

Slot (SDH-1) the sink line board. See Figure 3-28. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. In this example,
lot Level is set to VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range
Range (e.g.1,3-6) is set to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Step 5 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.

Step 6 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 7 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-87

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

3.16 Configuring Services on the SNCP Intersecting Rings

Compared to the SNCP tangent rings, the method of configuring the services on the SNCP
intersecting rings is complex and the protection scheme of the SNCP intersecting rings is
complete. In the case of the SNCP tangent rings and the SNCP intersecting rings, the services
can be protected when one fiber section is cut on either SNCP ring. In addition, the SNCP
intersecting rings can implement service protection when an intersecting NE fails. Hence, the
SNCP intersecting rings are applicable to the scenarios where the services need to be protected
when one intersecting node fails.
3.16.1 Networking Diagram
To construct two SNCP intersecting rings, you need to connect two physical ring networks
through two NEs (namely, the intersecting NEs). Compared with the SNCP tangent rings, the
SNCP intersecting rings can implement protection for services when one intersecting node fails.
3.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
On the SNCP intersecting rings, the method of allocating the timeslots for the services on non-
intersecting nodes is the same as the method of allocating the timeslots for the services on a
single SNCP ring. You need to note the traffic flow on the working and protection paths in the
SNCP protection groups of the two intersecting nodes when allocating the timeslots.
3.16.3 Configuration Process
To configure the services on the SNCP intersecting rings, you must configure the SNCP
protection groups and pass-through services on the two intersecting nodes. The service
configuration on non-intersecting nodes is the same as the service configuration on the SNCP
tangent rings.

3.16.1 Networking Diagram

To construct two SNCP intersecting rings, you need to connect two physical ring networks
through two NEs (namely, the intersecting NEs). Compared with the SNCP tangent rings, the
SNCP intersecting rings can implement protection for services when one intersecting node fails.
In the networking diagram shown in Figure 3-30, eight pieces of MSTP equipment construct
two SNCP intersecting rings and the intersecting NEs are NE3 and NE8. In this example, one
STM-1 service is added to the ring network from the source NE (NE1) and dropped from the
sink NE (NE6). The JL16 boards are used on the source NE (NE1) and sink NE (NE6) to add
and drop services and the JL64 boards are used on the source NE (NE1) and sink NE (NE6) to
transmit SDH services.

3-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Figure 3-30 Networking diagram of the SNCP intersecting rings

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

17 18
NE1

1 17
Line board 1-JL64 Line board 1-JL64
NE2 SNCP ring 1 NE4
Line board 17-JL64 Line board 17-JL64
17 1
NE3 NE8
1 1 Line board 1-JL64
1 17
7 Line board 2-JL64
2 18 2 18 Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

1 17
NE5 SNCP ring 2 NE7
17 1
Line board 1-JL64 Line board 1-JL64
Line board 17-JL64 NE6 Line board 17-JL64
18 17

Line board 1-JL16

Line board 17-JL64
Line board 18-JL64

3.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

On the SNCP intersecting rings, the method of allocating the timeslots for the services on non-
intersecting nodes is the same as the method of allocating the timeslots for the services on a
single SNCP ring. You need to note the traffic flow on the working and protection paths in the
SNCP protection groups of the two intersecting nodes when allocating the timeslots.
Figure 3-31 shows the signal flow of the services on the SNCP intersecting rings and the timeslot
allocation to the services on the SNCP intersecting rings.
You need to create two SNCP protection groups on NE3 and NE8, respectively. In the case of
the service source whose service travels across the two SNCP rings, you need to create a
unidirectional pass-through service on the local ring. This pass-through service functions as a
working source or protection source of the SNCP protection group of the other intersecting node.
l Normally, the traffic direction from SNCP ring 1 to SNCP ring 2 is NE1-NE2-NE3-NE5-
NE6.
– On NE3, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 1
to the board in slot 17. This pass-through service functions as the working source of
SNCP protection group 1 on NE8.
– On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 2
to the board in slot 18. This pass-through service functions as the protection source of
SNCP protection group 2 on NE8.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-89

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

– When the services are transmitted from SNCP ring 1 to SNCP ring 2, SNCP protection
group 1 on NE3 and SNCP protection group 1 on NE8 selectively receive the service.
Normally, the traffic direction of the selected working source is NE1→NE2→NE3.
– SNCP protection group 1 on NE6 selectively receives the service that enters SNCP ring
2. Normally, the traffic direction of the selected working source is NE3→NE5→NE6.
l Normally, the traffic direction from SNCP ring 2 to SNCP ring 1 is
NE6→NE7→NE8→NE4→NE1.
– On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 17
to the board in slot 1. This pass-through service functions as the protection source of
SNCP protection group 1 on NE3.
– On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 18
to the board in slot 2. This pass-through service functions as the working source of
SNCP protection group 2 on NE3.
– When the services are transmitted from SNCP ring 2 to SNCP ring 1, SNCP protection
group 1 on NE8 and SNCP protection group 2 on NE3 selectively receive the service
respectively. Normally, the traffic direction of the selected working source is
NE6→NE7→NE8.
– SNCP protection group 1 on NE1 selectively receives the service that enters SNCP ring
1. Normally, the traffic direction of the selected working source is NE8→NE4→NE1.
The traffic direction on the SNCP tangent rings is the same as the traffic direction on the SNCP
intersecting rings. In the case of the SNCP intersecting rings and SNCP tangent rings, the services
can be protected when a fiber is cut on either SNCP ring. The services, however, can be protected
only in the case of the SNCP intersecting rings, when one intersecting node fails.

3-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Figure 3-31 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

1xSTM-1
NE1:
SNCP Protection
Group Working Source Protection Source Service Sink
VC4: VC4-1 Protection group1 18-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL16

17 18
NE1

17
1
VC4: VC4-1 VC4: VC4-1
NE2 SNCP ring 1 NE4
Service pass-through Service pass-through
17
1

NE3: VC4: VC4-1

Unidirectional Cross- Service Source Service Sink NE8: VC4: VC4-1
1 17
Connection NE3 17 1
NE8
Unidirectional Cross-
Connection Service Source Service Sink
Cross-connection 1 1-JL64 17-JL64
Cross-connection 1 17-JL64 1-JL64
Cross-connection 2 2-JL64 18-JL64
Cross-connection 2 18-JL64 2-JL64
SNCP Protection Working Protection
Service Sink
Group Source Source SNCP Protection
Service Sink Working Source Protection Source
Protection group 1 2-JL64 1-JL64 17-JL64 Group
Protection group 1 18-JL64 1-JL64 17-JL64
Protection group 2 1-JL64 18-JL64 2-JL64
Protection group 2 17-JL64 18-JL64 2-JL64
2 18 2 18

1 17

VC4: VC4-1 NE5 NE7

SNCP ring 2
Service pass-through
1
17

18 NE6
17

VC4: VC4-1
NE6:
SNCP Protection
Working Source Protection Source Service Sink
Working path STM-16 line board 1xSTM-1 Group
Protection group 1 18-JL64 17-JL64 1-JL16
Protection path STM-64 line board

3.16.3 Configuration Process

To configure the services on the SNCP intersecting rings, you must configure the SNCP
protection groups and pass-through services on the two intersecting nodes. The service
configuration on non-intersecting nodes is the same as the service configuration on the SNCP
tangent rings.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.
l You must be familiar with 3.16.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Procedure
Step 1 Refer to Step 1 to Step 3 of 3.15.3 Configuration Process to configure services on NE1, NE2,
NE4, NE5, and NE7.

Step 2 Configure the SDH services on the intersecting NE (NE3).

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-91

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

1. On NE3, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 1 to
the board in slot 17. This pass-through service functions as the working source of SNCP
protection group 1 on NE8.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create on the lower-right pane. In the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and

received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used as
(SDH-1) the source board. See Figure 3-30. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-31, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as
(SDH-1) the sink board. See Figure 3-30. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-31, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

2. On NE3, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 2 to
the board in slot 18. This pass-through service functions as the protection source of SNCP
protection group 2 on NE8.
l Refer to Step 2.1 and configure the pass-through services in the first VC-4, from the
board in slot 2 on NE3 to the board in slot 18 on NE3.

3-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectional In this example, the service is transmitted and

received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Source Slot 2-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 2 is used as
(SDH-1) the source board. See Figure 3-30. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-31, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Sink Slot 18-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used as
(SDH-1) the sink board. See Figure 3-30. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-31, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

3. See Figure 3-31 to configure protection group 1 according to the plan of the protection
group on NE3.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create SNCP Service on the lower-right pane. In the Create SNCP Service
dialog box that is displayed, set the required parameters, and then click OK. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-93

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and

nal received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is available. Hence, Hold-off Time(100ms) need
not be specified. During the service configuration,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 1
ing e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the working service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce working service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

22Ti configured according to the plan. Level is set to
meslo VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
t to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Prote Sourc 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 17
ction e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the protection service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce protection service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

3-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink Slot 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 2
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

4. See Figure 3-31 to configure protection group 2 according to the plan of the protection
group on NE3.
l The method of configuring protection group 2 is the same as the method of configuring
protection group 1. Refer to Step 2.3 and set the parameters as follows.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and

nal received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is available. Hence, Hold-off Time(100ms) need
not be specified. During the service configuration,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 18
ing e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the working service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce working service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-95

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. Level is set to
lot VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Prote Sourc 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 2
ction e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the protection service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce protection service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 1
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Step 3 Configure the SDH services on the intersecting NE (NE8).

1. On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 17 to
the board in slot 1. This pass-through service functions as the protection source of SNCP
protection group 1 on NE3.
l Refer to Step 2.1 and configure the pass-through services in the first VC-4, from the
board in slot 17 on NE8 to the board in slot 18 on NE8.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Source Slot 17-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 17 is used as
(SDH-1) the source board. See Figure 3-28. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

3-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 1 is used as the
(SDH-1) sink board. See Figure 3-28. You can select different
sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
1,3-6) to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

2. On NE8, configure the pass-through service in the first VC-4, from the board in slot 18 to
the board in slot 2. This pass-through service functions as the working source of SNCP
protection group 2 on NE3.
l Refer to Step 2.1 and configure the pass-through services in the first VC-4, from the
board in slot 18 on NE8 to the board in slot 2 on NE8.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and received

nal on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Source Slot 18-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 18 is used as
(SDH-1) the source board. See Figure 3-28. You can select
different source boards depending on the actual
situation.

Source 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
1,3-6) set to 1.

Sink Slot 2-JL64-1 In this example, the JL64 board in slot 2 is used as the
(SDH-1) sink board. See Figure 3-28. You can select different
sink boards depending on the actual situation.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-97

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Timeslot configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Range(e.g. VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
1,3-6) to 1.

Activate Yes -
Immediately

3. See Figure 3-31 to configure protection group 1 according to the plan of the protection
group on NE8.
l Refer to Step 2.3 and configure SNCP protection group 1 on NE8. Set the parameters
as follows.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and

nal received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is available. Hence, Hold-off Time(100ms) need
not be specified. During the service configuration,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 1
ing e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the working service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce working service depending on the actual situation.

3-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. Level is set to
lot VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Prote Sourc 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 17
ction e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the protection service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce protection service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 18
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

4. See Figure 3-31 to configure protection group 2 according to the plan of the protection
group on NE8.
l The method of configuring protection group 2 is the same as the method of configuring
protection group 1. Refer to Step 2.3 and set the parameters as follows.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Service Type SNCP In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value SNCP.

Level VC4 In this example, the STM-1 service is configured.

Hence, Level of the service is set to VC4.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-99

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
3 Configuring SDH Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Direction Unidirectio In this example, the service is transmitted and

nal received on different paths. That is, the service is a
unidirectional service.

Revertive Revertive This parameter indicates whether the service is

Mode switched back after the faulty line is recovered, that
is, whether the switching is revertive or non-
revertive. During the service configuration,
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

Hold-off Time 0 In this example, only one protection switching mode

(100ms) is available. Hence, Hold-off Time(100ms) need
not be specified. During the service configuration,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 0.

WTR Time(s) 600 Generally, this parameter adopts the default value
600.

Work Sourc 18-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 18
ing e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the working service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce working service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

Times configured according to the plan. Level is set to
lot VC4. Hence, Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is set
Range to 1.
(e.g.
1,3-6)

Prote Sourc 2-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 2
ction e Slot (SDH-1) is used as the source board for the protection service.
Servi You can select different source boards for the
ce protection service depending on the actual situation.

Sourc 1 As shown in Figure 3-29, one STM-1 service is

e configured according to the plan. Level is set to
Times VC4. Hence, Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6) is
lot set to 1.
Range
(e.g.
1,3-6)

3-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring SDH Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 3-28, the JL64 board in slot 17
(SDH-1) is used as the sink line board. You can select
different sink boards depending on the actual
situation.

Step 4 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For details, see 8.6 Checking the
Configuration of SDH Services.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.2 Deleting SDH
Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-101

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4 Configuring Ethernet Services

About This Chapter

Huawei MSTP equipment supports Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line
(EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN), and Ethernet virtual private local area
network (EVPLAN) services, which comply with ITU-T G.8011x/Y.1307x.
4.1 Ethernet Service Types
Huawei MSTP equipment supports Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line
(EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN), and Ethernet virtual private local area
network (EVPLAN) services, which comply with ITU-T G.8011x/Y.1307x.
4.2 Basic Concepts
Before you configure the services on the Ethernet boards, you need to learn the basic concepts
including external port, internal port, logical port, and bridge so that you can understand the
service configuration process and the signal flow when the boards process the services.
4.3 Flow of Configuring Ethernet Services
This topic describes the configuration processes related to Ethernet services. Before you
configure Ethernet services according to the flow, you need to complete the basic configurations
of the NEs according to the flow of creating a network.
4.4 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board
EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the
bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication
equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support
VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.5 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board
EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the
bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication
equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support
VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.6 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services
The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users,
which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to be
transmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.
4.7 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmission
network and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)
service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner,
the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.
4.8 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services
The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicable
where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmission
network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ)
services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of different
users from each other.
4.9 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)
The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint
convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment
connected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning
cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.10 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)
The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication
equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags or
where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.11 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)
The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private
networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN
solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.1 Ethernet Service Types

Huawei MSTP equipment supports Ethernet private line (EPL), Ethernet virtual private line
(EVPL), Ethernet private local area network (EPLAN), and Ethernet virtual private local area
network (EVPLAN) services, which comply with ITU-T G.8011x/Y.1307x.

EPL Services
Two nodes are used to access EPL services and implement transparent transmission of the
Ethernet services of the users. The service of one user occupies one VCTRUNK and need not
share the bandwidth with the services of the other users. Hence, the extra QoS scheme and
security scheme are not required.

Figure 4-1 EPL services

User A1 User A2

NE 1 NE2

Port1 VCTRUNK1 Port1

Port2 Port2
VCTRUNK2
User B1 User B2

The corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs are provided in Table
4-1.

Table 4-1 Corresponding relations between the PORTs and VCTRUNKs (EPL services)

NE1 NE2

User A1 PORT1←→VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1←→PORT1 User A2

User B1 PORT2←→VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2←→PORT2 User B2

EVPL Services
EVPL services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN/QinQ scheme
needs to be used for differentiating the data of different users. If the services of different users
need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the corresponding QoS
scheme. EVPL services are classified into two types, depending on whether the PORTs or
VCTRUNKs are shared.
l PORT-shared EVPL services

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

As shown in Figure 4-2, the services of different users are accessed through a PORT at a station,
and are then isolated from each other by using the VLAN IDs. Services are transmitted to other
PORTs at this station through different VCTRUNKs.

Figure 4-2 PORT-shared EVPL services

User C2

User C1 NE 1 NE2
Port1
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 Port1
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK2 Port2
User C3

The corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs are provided in Table
4-2.

Table 4-2 Corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs (PORT-shared
EVPL services)
NE1 NE2

User C1 PORT1←→VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1←→PORT1 User C2

PORT1←→VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2←→PORT2 User C3

l VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services Ethernet boards support the convergence and

distribution of EVPL services by using the following modes:
– VLAN tag-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services
– QinQ technology-based convergence and distribution of EVPL services
As shown in Figure 4-3, the services of different users are isolated by using the VLAN/QinQ
scheme. Hence, the services of different users can be transmitted in the same VCTRUNK.

Figure 4-3 VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

User D1 User D2

NE 1 NE2

Port1 Port1
VCTRUNK1
Port2 Port2
User E1 User E2

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

The corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs are provided in Table
4-3.

Table 4-3 Corresponding relations between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs (VCTRUNK-
shared EVPL services)

NE1 NE2

User D1 PORT1←→VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1←→PORT1 User D2

1

User E1 PORT2←→VCTRUNK VCTRUNK1←→PORT2 User E2

1

EPLAN Services
The EPLAN services can be accessed from a minimum of two nodes. Hence, the services of
different users need not share the bandwidth. In addition, the extra QoS scheme and security
scheme are not required. re is more than one node. Hence, the nodes need to learn the MAC
addresses and forward data according to MAC addresses. Therefore, Layer 2 switching is
realized.

As shown in Figure 4-4, three branches of user F need to communicate with each other. On
NE1, the IEEE 802.1d bridge is established to implement EPLAN services. The IEEE 802.1d
bridge can create the MAC address-based forwarding table, which is periodically updated by
using the self-learning function of the system. The accessed data can be forwarded or broadcast
within the domain of the IEEE 802.1d bridge according to the destination MAC addresses.

Figure 4-4 EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

NE3
T2000

NE2 NE4

PORT1 NE1 PORT1

F2 F3
PORT5
IEEE 802.1d bridge
VCTRUNK
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
F1
PORT5

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

EVPLAN Services
EVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN/QinQ
scheme needs to be used for differentiating the data of different users. If the services of different
users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the corresponding
QoS scheme.

As shown in Figure 4-5, three branches of user G need to communicate with each other. Services
of user G need to be isolated from the services of user H. In this case, the operator needs to
separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, be established on NE1 to achieve
EVPLAN services.

IEEE 802.1q bridge: IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of VLAN tags.
This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames and performs Layer
2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Figure 4-5 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NE3
T2000

PORT2 PORT2
H2 NE2 NE4
H3
PORT1 NE1 PORT1
G2 G3

H1 G1
PORT6 PORT5
VCTRUNK

IEEE 802.1q bridge IEEE 802.1q bridge

VLAN 200 VLAN 100
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT6 PORT5

As shown in Figure 4-6, the VoIP services from user M and the HSI services from user N need
to access the VoiP server and the HSI server respectively. In this case, the operator needs to
separately groom the VoIP services and HSI services, and isolate the data on the transmission
network side. On NE1, the IEEE 802.1ad bridge must be established to support the EVPLAN
services.

IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers of VLAN
tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and supports only
the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge supports the following
switching modes:

l This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and
performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the packets.

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets, and performs
Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the
packets.

Figure 4-6 EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NE3
T2000
Service C-VLAN Service C-VLAN
VoIP 10 VoIP 10
HSI 20 HSI 20
PORT1 PORT1
User M NE2 NE4 User N
8 NE1 11

VoIP 11 8
HSI
PORT5 PORT6
VCTRUNK

IEEE 802.1ad bridge IEEE 802.1ad bridge

S-VLAN 100 S-VLAN 200
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

PORT5 PORT6

4.2 Basic Concepts

Before you configure the services on the Ethernet boards, you need to learn the basic concepts
including external port, internal port, logical port, and bridge so that you can understand the
service configuration process and the signal flow when the boards process the services.
4.2.1 Formats of Ethernet Frames
To implement the VLAN and QinQ functions, the IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad protocols
define different formats of the Ethernet frames, which contain different VLAN information.
4.2.2 External Ports and Internal Ports
External ports on Ethernet boards are used to access the services on the user side. Internal ports
on Ethernet boards are used to encapsulate and map the services into the transmission network
for transparent transmission.
4.2.3 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported
working mode to the opposite end on the network. This function also allows the network
equipment to receive similar information that the opposite end may transfer.
4.2.4 Flow Control
During data processing/transferring, if the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the
port, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of packets that are discarded due to
buffer overflowing, proper flow control measures must be taken.
4.2.5 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocol

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

To ensure that Ethernet frames can be transparently transmitted over the optical transmission
network, the Ethernet frames need to be encapsulated and mapped into VC containers at the
access point. The encapsulation and mapping protocols used by the Ethernet service board
include the high-level data link control (HDLC), link access procedure - SDH (LAPS), and
generic framing procedure (GFP).
4.2.6 Virtual Concatenation
The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence,
if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, a large amount of
transmission bandwidth is wasted. To solve this problem, use the virtual concatenation
technology to concatenate many standard VC containers into a large VC container that adapts
to the rate of the Ethernet service.
4.2.7 Tag Attributes
When data frames enter or exit a port on an Ethernet board, the processing mode of the data
frames is determined by the tag attributes of this port.
4.2.8 Bridge
The bridge is the functional unit that is used to implement the interconnection between two or
more LANs.

4.2.1 Formats of Ethernet Frames

To implement the VLAN and QinQ functions, the IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad protocols
define different formats of the Ethernet frames, which contain different VLAN information.
To implement the VLAN function, the IEEE 802.1q protocol defines the Ethernet frame format
that contains the VLAN information. Compared with the ordinary Ethernet frame, the frame
with the format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol is added with a four-byte header.
To implement VLAN mesting (QinQ), the IEEE 802.1ad protocol defines two VLAN tag types.
See Figure 4-7. The VLAN tag types are defined to differentiate the services on the client side
and the services on the supplier service side.
l The VLAN tag used on the client side is represented as C-VLAN, of which the frame format
is the same as the frame format defined by the IEEE 802.1q protocol.
l The VLAN tag used on the supplier service side is represented as S-VLAN.

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-7 Formats of Ethernet frames

802.1q frame format

Destination Source MAC FCS Check

Address VLAN Length/Type Data
MAC Address Character
Variable
6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes
length

Format of the frame with

one C-VLAN tag

Destination Source MAC FCS Check

Address C-VLAN Length/Type Data
MAC Address Character

6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes Variable 4 bytes

length
Format of the frame with
one S-VLAN tag nested
with one C-VLAN tag

Destination Source MAC S-VLAN C-VLAN Data FCS Check

Length/Type
MAC Address Address Character
Variable
6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes
length

The length of the data field is variable. maximum length of the data field depends on the
maximum frame length that the ports of the equipment support.
The four-byte S-VLAN or C-VLAN field is divided into two sub-fields: the tag protocol ID
(TPID) and the tag control Information (TCI).
Both the TPID and TCI consist of two bytes. See Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Positions of the TPID and TCI in the frame structure

S-VLAN C-VLAN

Destination Source MAC TPID TCI TPID TCI Length/Type Data FCS Check
MAC Address Address Character
Variable
6 bytes 6 bytes 2 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes
length

l TPID structure
The TPID consists of two bytes and indicates the VLAN tag type. TPID of the C-VLAN is
always 0x8100 whereas the TPID of the S-VLAN can be customized. Refer to Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 Tag types defined by using the TPID

Tag Type Name Value

C-VLAN Tag 802.1q Tag Protocol Type 0x8100

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Tag Type Name Value

S-VLAN Tag 802.1q Service Tag Type Customizable

NOTE

The IEEE 802.1ad specifies the TPID of the S-VLAN to 0x88a8. In actual application, the setting of TPID
for the S-VLAN tag varies according to the equipment manufacturer. To ensure compatibility between
interconnected equipment, it is recommended that you set the TPIDs of the S-VLAN tags of the
interconnected equipment to the same value within 0X600-FFFF.
l TCI structure

The TCI structure of the S-TAG is basically the same as the TCI structure of the C-TAG. VLAN
ID (VID) field consists of 12 bits and ranges from 0 to 4095. The difference is that the TCI of
the S-TAG contains the drop eligible (DE) indication and works with the priority code point
(PCP) to indicate the priority of the S-TAG frame.

The TCI structures of the C-TAG and S-TAG are shown in Figure 4-9 and Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-9 TCI structure of the C-TAG

Octets: 1 2
PCP CFI VID VID

Bits: 8 6 5 4 1 8 1

The TCI field of the C-TAG consists of the following bytes:

l PCP: three bits

l CFI: one bit

Figure 4-10 TCI structure of the S-TAG

Octets: 1 2
PCP DE VID VID

Bits: 8 6 5 4 1 8 1

The TCI field of the S-TAG consists of the following bytes:

l PCP: three bits

l DE: one bit
l VID: 12 bits

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.2.2 External Ports and Internal Ports

External ports on Ethernet boards are used to access the services on the user side. Internal ports
on Ethernet boards are used to encapsulate and map the services into the transmission network
for transparent transmission.

External ports on Ethernet boards (that is, external physical ports) are also referred to as client-
side ports or user-side ports, which are used to access the Ethernet services on the user side.

Internal ports on Ethernet boards (that is, internal VCTRUNKs) are also referred to as system-
side ports or backplane-side ports in certain cases, which are used to encapsulate and map the
services into the SDH side.

VCTRUNKs are VC-based transmission paths, which can be implemented by using the adjacent
concatenation or virtual concatenation technology. On the T2000 window, paths are bound to
specify the bandwidth of different granularities for a VCTRUNK port.

Figure 4-11 External ports and internal ports on Ethernet boards

External port VCTRUNK port
Backplane

Cross-
Interface Service Encapsulation/ Interface connect unit
module processing Mapping conversion
module module module Cross-
connect unit
Ethernet board

4.2.3 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported
working mode to the opposite end on the network. This function also allows the network
equipment to receive similar information that the opposite end may transfer.

The working modes of the interconnected ports on the equipment at both ends must be the same.
Otherwise, the services are unavailable.

If the working mode of the port of the equipment on the opposite side is full duplex and if the
working mode of the port on the local equipment is auto-negotiation, the local equipment works
in the half-duplex mode. That is, the working modes of the interconnected ports at both ends are
different, and thus packets may be lost. Hence, when the working mode of the port of the
equipment on the opposite side is full duplex, you need to set working mode of the port on the
local equipment to full duplex.

NOTE

When the interconnected ports on both sides work in the auto-negotiation mode, the equipment on both
sides can negotiate the flow control through the auto-negotiation function.

The auto-negotiation function uses fast link pulses (FLPs) and normal link pulses (NLPs) to
transfer information of the working mode so that no packet or upper layer protocol overhead
needs to be added.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-11

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.2.4 Flow Control

During data processing/transferring, if the equipment fails to handle the flow received at the
port, congestion occurs on the line. To reduce the number of packets that are discarded due to
buffer overflowing, proper flow control measures must be taken.

The half-duplex Ethernet port uses the back-pressure mechanism to control the flow. The full-
duplex Ethernet port applies PAUSE frames to control the flow. Currently, the half-duplex
Ethernet function is not widely applied. Hence, the flow control function realized by Ethernet
service boards is used for the full-duplex Ethernet ports.

The flow control function realized by Ethernet service boards is classified into two types: auto-
negotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in the auto-negotiation mode, you can adopt the auto-negotiation
flow control function. The auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l Enable dissymmetric flow control
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Enable symmetric flow control
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
l Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control
The port has the following abilities:
– Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
– Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.
– Processes the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.
l Disable
The port does not support the non-auto-negotiation flow control function.

Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control

When the Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, you can adopt the non-auto-negotiation
flow control function. The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Receive only
The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in
the case of congestion.
l Send and receive
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process the received PAUSE frames.
l Disable
The port does not support the non-auto-negotiation flow control function.

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Realization Principle
The realization principle of the flow control function is described as follows:

1. When congestion occurs in the receive queue of an Ethernet port (the data in the receive
buffer exceeds a certain threshold) and the port is capable of sending PAUSE frames, the
port sends a PAUSE frame to the opposite end. The pause-time value in the frame is N
(0<N≤65535).
2. If the Ethernet port at the opposite end is capable of processing PAUSE frames, this Ethernet
port stops sending data within a specified period of time N (the unit is the time required for
sending 512 bits) after receiving the PAUSE frame.
3. If the congestion at the receive port is cleared (the data in the receive buffer is below a
certain threshold) but the pause-time does not end, the port sends a PAUSE frame whose
pause-time is 0 to notify the opposite end to send data.

IEEE 802.3 defines the format of the PAUSE frame as follows:

l Destination address: 01-80-C2-00-00-01 (multicast address)

l Source address: MAC address of the source port
l Type/Length: 88-08 (MAC control frame)
l MAC control code: 00-01 (PAUSE frame)
l MAC control parameter: pause-time (two bytes)

Figure 4-12 Structure of the PAUSE frame

Destination address 01-80-C2-00-00-01 6 octets

Source address XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX 6 octets

Type/Length 88-08 2 octets

MAC control opcode 00-01 2 octets

MAC control parameter

XX-XX 2 octets
(pause-time)

Reserved

4.2.5 Encapsulation and Mapping Protocol

To ensure that Ethernet frames can be transparently transmitted over the optical transmission
network, the Ethernet frames need to be encapsulated and mapped into VC containers at the
access point. The encapsulation and mapping protocols used by the Ethernet service board
include the high-level data link control (HDLC), link access procedure - SDH (LAPS), and
generic framing procedure (GFP).

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-13

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

HDLC
The HDLC is a general data link control procedure. When using the HDLC protocol, the system
encapsulates data services into HDLC-like frames as information bits and maps the frames into
SDH VC containers.

LAPS
The LAPS is also a data link control procedure. It is optimized based on the HDLC. The LAPS
complies with ITU-T X.86.

GFP
The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a
general mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can
map the variable-length payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals
can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented, such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-
code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or common bit data streams. The GFP
protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.
The GFP defines the following modes to adapt client signals:
l Frame-mapped GFP (GFP-F)
The GFP-F is a PDU-oriented processing mode. It encapsulates the entire PDU into the
GFP payload area and makes no modification on the encapsulated data. It determines
whether to add a detection area for the payload area, depending on requirements.
l Transparent GFP (GFG-T)
The GFP-T is a block-code (8B/10B code block) oriented processing mode. It extracts a
single character from the received data block and maps the character into the fixed-length
GFP frame.

4.2.6 Virtual Concatenation

The rate of the Ethernet service does not adapt to the rate of the standard VC container. Hence,
if you directly map the Ethernet service data into a standard VC container, a large amount of
transmission bandwidth is wasted. To solve this problem, use the virtual concatenation
technology to concatenate many standard VC containers into a large VC container that adapts
to the rate of the Ethernet service.
The concatenation defined in ITU-T G.707 is contiguous concatenation and virtual
concatenation. Both concatenation methods provide concatenated bandwidth of X times
Container-N at the path termination.
Contiguous concatenation concatenates the contiguous VC-4s that belong to the same STM-N
into a complete structure that needs to be transported. It maintains the contiguous bandwidth
throughout the entire transportation. Virtual concatenation concatenates many individual VC
containers (VC-12 containers, VC-3 containers, or VC-4 containers) into a bit virtual structure
to transport. The virtual concatenation breaks the contiguous bandwidth into individual VCs,
transports the individual VCs, and recombines these VCs into a contiguous bandwidth at the
transmission termination point.
In the case of virtual concatenation, the transportation of each VC container may occupy different
paths and there may be a transport delay difference between VC containers. Hence, the client
signal cannot be restored easily. Virtual concatenation requires concatenation functionality only

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

at the path termination equipment and it can flexibly allocate bandwidth. Hence, the virtual
concatenation technology is widely used.
Virtual concatenation is of two types: virtual concatenation in a higher order path and virtual
concatenation in a lower order path. A higher order virtual concatenation VC4-Xv provides a
payload of X Container-4s (VC-4s). The payload is mapped individually into X independent
VC-4s. Each VC-4 has its own POH. The process of virtual concatenation of VC-3s is the same.

VC4-Xv and VC3-Xv

The virtual container that is formed by a VC4-Xv/VC3-Xv can be mapped into X individual
VC-4/VC-3s that form the VC4-Xv/VC3-Xv. Each VC-4/VC-3 has its own POH. POH has the
same specifications as the ordinary VC-4 POH. The H4 byte in the POH is used for the virtual
concatenation-specific multiframe indicator (MFI) and sequence indicator (SQ).
MFI indicates the position of a frame in the multiframe. Each frame sent by the source carries
the MFI information. The sink end combines the frames with the same MFI into the Cn-Xv. MFI
includes MFI-1 and MFI-2. MFI-1 is transmitted by bits 5-8 of the H4 byte and ranges from 0
to 15. MFI-2 is transmitted by the two frames of which the MFI-1 is "0" and "1" in the multiframe.
Bits 1-4 of the H4 bytes of the two frames indicate the higher four bits and lower four bits of
the MFI-2 respectively. Hence, the MFI-2 ranges from 0 to 255. That is, a multiframe consists
of 4096 frames and the period is 512 ms.
SQ indicates the position of a frame in the Cn-Xv. The source end inserts the SQ information
into the frame according to the payload allocation sequence. The sink end determines the
sequence of extracting the payload from the frames that form Cn-Xv according to the SQ. SQ
is transmitted by the two frames of which the MFI-1 is "14" and "15" in the multiframe. Bits
1-4 of the H4 bytes of the two frames indicate the higher four bits and lower four bits of the SQ
respectively.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-15

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-13 VC3-Xv/VC4-Xv multiframe and sequence indicator

C3-X/C4-X C3-Xv/C4-Xv
SQ = X-1

H
1 X SQ = 0 =0

POH
MFI-1 = 0 =0
MFI-2 = 0 X-1
SQ = 0 =1

POH
MFI-1 = 1 =0
MFI-2 = 0

Multiframe (MF)
SQ = X-1

H
SQ = 0 = 15

POH
MFI-1 = 15 = 0
MFI-2 = 0 X-1
SQ = 0 =0
POH MFI-1 = 0 = 15
MFI-2 = 1

H SQ = X-1
SQ = 0 = 15
POH

MFI-1 = 15 = 255
MFI-2 = 255 X-1
SQ = 0 =0
POH

MFI-1 = 0 =0
MFI-2 = 0

With the MFI and SQ, the sink end can correctly restore the position of each frame in the Cn-
Xv to prevent the frame alignment problem due to the different propagation delays of the frames.

4.2.7 Tag Attributes

When data frames enter or exit a port on an Ethernet board, the processing mode of the data
frames is determined by the tag attributes of this port.
Three types of tags for ports on Ethernet boards are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.

Table 4-5 Processing mode of data frames at ports with different tags
Direction Data Frame Type Processing Mode

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Ingress port Frames with VLAN Transparently Discards the frames. Transparently
tags transmits the transmits the
frames. frames.

Frames without Discards the frames. Adds the VLAN tags that contain Default
VLAN tags VLAN ID and VLAN Priority and
transparently transmits the frames.

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Direction Data Frame Type Processing Mode

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Egress port Frames with VLAN Transparently Strips the VLAN l If the VLAN IDs
tags transmits the tags and transmits contained in the
frames. the frames. data frames are
Default VLAN
ID, strips the
VLAN tag and
transmits the
data frames.
l If the VLAN IDs
contained in the
data frames are
not Default
VLAN ID,
transparently
transmits the
data frames.

NOTE

The tag setting is valid only if the following conditions are met:
l The port type is PE or UNI.
l The entry detection function is enabled. When the Ethernet switching board works in the Ethernet
transparent transmission state and when the entry detection function is disabled, the ports transparently
transmit the received data frames regardless of whether the data frames have the VLAN tags.

Based on the tag aware, access, and hybrid features, adhere to the following principles when
setting the tag for a port:

l If the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment carry the VLAN tags,
set the local port to the tag aware mode.
l If the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment do not carry the VLAN
tags, set the local port to the access mode.
l If it is uncertain whether the data packets transmitted from the interconnected equipment
carry the VLAN tags, set the local port to the hybrid mode.

4.2.8 Bridge
The bridge is the functional unit that is used to implement the interconnection between two or
more LANs.

VB and LP
The various bridge is the unique concept for Huawei products. In the case of the Ethernet data
boards that have the Layer 2 switching capability, the switching domain can be divided into
multiple sub-switching domains. As a result, if no services are interconnected, different VBs
cannot access each other. Each VB has an independent configuration mode and uses an
independent VLAN. Different VBs can use the same VLAN.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-17

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

A VB can contain a number of logical ports (LPs). By configuring the mounting relation, you
can mount multiple MAC ports and VCTRUNK ports to the same VB.

Figure 4-14 shows the relation between the VBs, LPs, PORTs, and VCTRUNKs.

Figure 4-14 Relation between the VBs, LPs, PORTs, and VCTRUNKs

Ethernet Switching Board

VB
1
PORT1 LP LP VCTRUNK1
1 4

PORT2 LP LP VCTRUNK2
2 5

LP LP
PORT3 VCTRUNK3
3 6

VB
2
PORT4 LP LP VCTRUNK4
1 4

PORT5 LP LP
VCTRUNK5
2 5

LP LP
PORT6 VCTRUNK6
3 6

Virtual Bridge
l The services of different virtual bridges are isolated and the services with different VLAN
IDs in the same virtual bridge are also isolated. The switching domain of the entire virtual
bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching domains according to the VLAN IDs.
NOTE

As shown in Figure 4-15, the same logical port may belong to one or more sub-switching domains with
different VLAN IDs. On the T2000, the same logical port can belong to multiple filtering tables for different
VLAN IDs.

Figure 4-15 Virtual bridge

VCTRUNK1
PORT1 VLAN1
VCTRUNK2
VLAN2 VCTRUNK3
PORT2
VCTRUNK4
VCTRUNK5
PORT3 VLAN3
VCTRUNK6
Virtual bridge

4-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-6 Virtual bridge

Item Virtual Bridge

VLAN filtering table It must be configured.

Ingress Filter The validity of VLAN tags is checked. If the

VLAN ID in the VLAN tag is not the same as
defined in the VLAN filtering table, the data
frame is discarded.

MAC address learning mode IVL

Data frame forwarding mode The forwarding port can be queried according
to the destination MAC address and VLAN
ID of the data frame, in the MAC address
table.

Broadcast range The broadcast frames are forwarded to the

forwarding ports defined in the VLAN
filtering table.

NOTE

To forward a Layer 2 switching service, a bridge must learn the MAC address. A bridge learns the MAC
address through one of the following methods: shared VLAN learning (SVL) and independent VLAN
learning (IVL).

Types of Bridges
As listed in Table 4-7, the Ethernet boards support three types of bridges.

Table 4-7 Types of bridges supported by the Ethernet boards

Bridge Type Bridge Switch Mode Bridge Learning Ingress
Mode Filter

IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge SVL/Ingress Filter SVL Disabled

Disable

IEEE 802.1q Virtual Bridge IVL/Ingress Filter IVL Enabled

Enable

IEEE 802.1ad 1 SVL/Ingress Filter SVL Disabled

provider bridge Disable
2 IVL/Ingress Filter IVL Enabled
Enable

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-19

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge: The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not check the contents of
the VLAN tags that are in the data frames. It performs Layer 2 switching according to the
destination MAC addresses of the data frames.
l IEEE 802.1q bridge: The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using one layer of
VLAN tags. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames
and performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN
IDs.
l The IEEE 802.1ad bridge: The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with two layers
of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and
supports only the mounted ports whose attributes are C-Aware or S-Aware. This bridge
supports the following switching modes:
1. This bridge does not check the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets. It
performs Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses of the
packets.
2. This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are in the packets and performs
Layer 2 switching according to the destination MAC addresses and the S-VLAN IDs
of the packets.

MAC Address Table

The entries in the MAC address table indicate the corresponding relation between the MAC
addresses and the ports. MAC address table contains the following entries:
l Dynamic entry
Indicates the entry that the bridge obtains by adopting the SVL/IVL learning mode. The
dynamic entry ages and is even lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
l Static entry
Indicates the entry corresponding to the MAC address and the port that the network
administrator manually adds in the MAC address table on the T2000. The dynamic entry
does not age and is not lost after the Ethernet switching board is reset.
l Blackhole entry
Indicates the entry used to discard the data frame that contains the specified destination
MAC address, and is also referred to as the MAC address disable entry. The blackhole entry
is configured by the network administrator. This entry does not age and is not lost after the
Ethernet switching board is reset.
NOTE

l If a routing entry is not updated within a specific period of time, that is, if the MAC address fails to be learnt
because the new data frame from the MAC address is not received, this routing entry is automatically deleted.
This mechanism is considered as aging, and this period of time is considered as the aging time. The aging
time of the MAC address table is five minutes by default and can be set by using the T2000.
l A limited number of MAC addresses can be learnt at a time.

Hub/Spoke
Generally, the central station and non-central stations can access each other but the non-central
stations cannot access each other in the case of convergence services. Hence, the ports mounted
to the bridge need to be defined as Hub ports or Spoke ports.
l Hub port
Hub ports can access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can also access each other.

4-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Spoke port
Spoke ports cannot access each other. Hub ports and Spoke ports can access each other.
The mounted ports are Hub ports by default.

4.3 Flow of Configuring Ethernet Services

This topic describes the configuration processes related to Ethernet services. Before you
configure Ethernet services according to the flow, you need to complete the basic configurations
of the NEs according to the flow of creating a network.
4.3.1 Flow of Configuring EPL Services
The EPL services feature simplicity, transparent transmission, and dedicated bandwidth. The
configuration flow differs depending on whether Ethernet transparent transmission boards or
Ethernet switching boards are configured.
4.3.2 Flow of Configuring EVPL Services
In the case of EVPL services, services of different users share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN
ID or other schemes need to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the
services of different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt
the corresponding QoS scheme.
4.3.3 Flow of Configuring EPLAN Services
EPLAN services provide the customers with Layer 2 switching-based multipoint-connected
LAN services.
4.3.4 Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services
EVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN ID or other
schemes need to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the services of
different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the
corresponding QoS scheme.

4.3.1 Flow of Configuring EPL Services

The EPL services feature simplicity, transparent transmission, and dedicated bandwidth. The
configuration flow differs depending on whether Ethernet transparent transmission boards or
Ethernet switching boards are configured.
Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used to configure
EPL services. The Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet switching boards are
provided in Table 9-1.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-21

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-16 Flow of configuring EPL services

Required Start

Optional
Ethernet transparent Ethernet switching
transmission board board

1 1
Configure Ethernet Configure Ethernet
external ports external ports

2 2
Configure Ethernet Configure Ethernet
internal ports internal ports

3
Create EPL services

4
Create cross-
connections

5
Check service
continuity

6 Enable NE
performance
monitoring

7
Back up NE
configuration data

End

Table 4-8 Flow of configuring EPL services

Step Operation Remarks

1 8.7 Configuring External Ports on Required

Ethernet Boards When an NE accesses Ethernet services through the
external ports on the Ethernet board, you need to
configure the attributes of the external ports so that the
external ports can work with the data communication
equipment on the client side, thus ensuring the normal
accessing of the Ethernet services.

4-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step Operation Remarks

2 8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Required

Ethernet Boards When an NE transmits Ethernet services through the
internal ports (that is, VCTRUNK ports) on the Ethernet
board to the SDH side, you need to configure the attributes
of the VCTRUNK ports so that the VCTRUNK ports can
work with the Ethernet board on the opposite equipment.
This ensures that the transmission of the Ethernet services
in the SDH network is normal.

3 8.10 Creating Ethernet Private Line l If Ethernet transparent transmission boards are used,
Services and Ethernet Virtual Private go to Step 4. On Ethernet transparent transmission
Line Services boards, the EPL service connections from the PORTs
to the VCTRUNKs are considered to be created by
default.
l If Ethernet switching boards are used, the EPL service
connections between the PORTs and the VCTRUNKs
must be created.

4 8.1 Creating SDH Services Required

This topic describes how to create the timeslot
connections between the bound paths and the line board,
thus ensuring that the Ethernet services are transmitted in
specified timeslots over the transmission line.

5 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels Required

After the Ethernet services are created, test the service
continuity.

6 8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Required

Parameters of an NE Enable the performance monitoring function for a specific
NE. Then, you can obtain detailed performance records
during the operation process of this NE. These records can
be used for monitoring and analyzing the running status
of this NE.

7 l 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to Required

the SCC Board Back up the NE database to ensure that the NE can be
l 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the automatically restored after the SCC data is lost or after
NE Database to a CF Card the equipment is powered off.
l 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE
Database to a CF Card

4.3.2 Flow of Configuring EVPL Services

In the case of EVPL services, services of different users share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN
ID or other schemes need to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the
services of different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt
the corresponding QoS scheme.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-23

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

The Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring EVPL services. The Ethernet
switching boards that support EVPL services are provided in Table 9-1.

Figure 4-17 Flow of configuring EVPL services

Required Start

Optional 1
Configure Ethernet
external ports

2
Configure Ethernet
internal ports

3
Create EVPL
services

4
Create cross-
connections

5
Configure the QoS

6
Check service
continuity

7 Enable NE
performance
monitoring

8
Back up NE
configuration data

End

4-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-9 Flow of configuring EVPL services

Step Operation Remarks

1 8.7 Configuring External Ports on Ethernet Required

Boards When an NE accesses Ethernet services through
the external ports on the Ethernet board, you need
to configure the attributes of the external ports so
that the external ports can work with the data
communication equipment on the client side, thus
ensuring the normal accessing of the Ethernet
services.

2 8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Ethernet Required

Boards When an NE transmits Ethernet services through
the internal ports (that is, VCTRUNK ports) on the
Ethernet board to the SDH side, you need to
configure the attributes of the VCTRUNK ports so
that the VCTRUNK ports can work with the
Ethernet board on the opposite equipment. This
ensures that the transmission of the Ethernet
services in the SDH network is normal.

3 8.10 Creating Ethernet Private Line Services Required

and Ethernet Virtual Private Line Services When the Ethernet switching board transmits an
EVPL service, you need to specify the relevant
information such as the service source and service
sink.

4 8.1 Creating SDH Services Required

This topic describes how to create the timeslot
connections between the bound paths and the line
board, thus ensuring that the Ethernet services are
transmitted in specified timeslots over the
transmission line.

5 Configure the QoS Optional

The services of different users need to share the
bandwidth. If the services of different users need
to be configured with different quality levels, you
need to adopt the corresponding QoS scheme.

6 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels Required

After the Ethernet services are created, test the
service continuity.

7 8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Required

Parameters of an NE Enable the performance monitoring function for a
specific NE. Then, you can obtain detailed
performance records during the operation process
of this NE. These records can be used for
monitoring and analyzing the running status of this
NE.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-25

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Step Operation Remarks

8 l 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the Required

SCC Board Back up the NE database to ensure that the NE can
l 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE be automatically restored after the SCC data is lost
Database to a CF Card or after the equipment is powered off.
l 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
to a CF Card

4.3.3 Flow of Configuring EPLAN Services

EPLAN services provide the customers with Layer 2 switching-based multipoint-connected
LAN services.
The Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring EPLAN services. The Ethernet
switching boards that support EPLAN services are provided in Table 9-1.

4-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-18 Flow of configuring EPLAN services

Required Start

Optional 1
Configure Ethernet
external ports

2
Configure Ethernet
internal ports

3
Create EPLAN
services

4 Modify Hub/Spoke
attribute of mounted
ports

5
Create cross-
connections

6
Configure the Layer
2 switching feature

7
Check service
continuity

8 Enable NE
performance
monitoring

9
Back up NE
configuration data

End

Table 4-10 Flow of configuring EPLAN services

Step Operation Remarks

1 8.7 Configuring External Ports on Ethernet Required

Boards When an NE accesses Ethernet services through
the external ports on the Ethernet board, you need
to configure the attributes of the external ports so
that the external ports can work with the data
communication equipment on the client side, thus
ensuring the normal accessing of the Ethernet
services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-27

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Step Operation Remarks

2 8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Ethernet Required

Boards When an NE transmits Ethernet services through
the internal ports (that is, VCTRUNK ports) on the
Ethernet board to the SDH side, you need to
configure the attributes of the VCTRUNK ports so
that the VCTRUNK ports can work with the
Ethernet board on the opposite equipment. This
ensures that the transmission of the Ethernet
services in the SDH network is normal.

3 8.11 Creating EPLAN Services and EVPLAN Required

Services When an Ethernet switching board carries LAN
services, you need to create the bridge and set the
attributes of the bridge and the port mounted to the
bridge.

4 Modify Hub/Spoke attribute of mounted ports Optional

In the case of Ethernet LAN services, you can
modify the Hub/Spoke attribute between access
nodes from the default value of Hub to Spoke, thus
disabling the communication between the access
nodes; however, the communication between the
access nodes and the convergence node is enabled.

5 8.1 Creating SDH Services Required

This topic describes how to create the timeslot
connections between the bound paths and the line
board, thus ensuring that the Ethernet services are
transmitted in specified timeslots over the
transmission line.

6 Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Optional

l Creating MAC Address Entries l You can manually specify the port for
l Modifying Aging Time of MAC Addresses forwarding the MAC frames to create the
VLAN unicast entries and you can suppress the
l Configuring the STP/RSTP forwarding of certain MAC frames to create the
MAC address disabled entries. The manually
created MAC entries are not affected by the
aging time.
l The aging time of the dynamic MAC address
entries of an Ethernet switching board is five
minutes by default. You can modify the aging
time according to the actual requirements.
l There may be loops in the network topology of
Ethernet services. Hence, the STP/RSTP
protocol is enabled to prevent packets from
being proliferated and endlessly cycled in the
loop network.

4-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step Operation Remarks

7 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels Required

After the Ethernet services are created, test the
service continuity.

8 8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Required

Parameters of an NE Enable the performance monitoring function for a
specific NE. Then, you can obtain detailed
performance records during the operation process
of this NE. These records can be used for
monitoring and analyzing the running status of this
NE.

9 l 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the Required

SCC Board Back up the NE database to ensure that the NE can
l 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE be automatically restored after the SCC data is lost
Database to a CF Card or after the equipment is powered off.
l 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
to a CF Card

4.3.4 Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services

EVPLAN services of different users need to share the bandwidth. Hence, the VLAN ID or other
schemes need to be used for differentiating the services of different users. If the services of
different users need to be configured with different quality levels, you need to adopt the
corresponding QoS scheme.
The Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring EVPLAN services. The Ethernet
switching boards that support EVPLAN services are provided in Table 9-1.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-29

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-19 Flow of configuring EVPLAN services

Required Start

Optional 1
Configure Ethernet
external ports

2
Configure Ethernet
internal ports

3
Create EVPLAN
services

4
Create the VLAN
filtering table

5 Modify the Hub/

Spoke attribute of
mounted ports

6
Create cross-
connections

7
Configure the Layer
2 switching feature

8
Configure the QoS

9
Check service
continuity

10 Enable NE
performance
monitoring

11
Back up NE
configuration data

End

4-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-11 Flow of configuring EVPLAN services

Step Operation Remarks

1 8.7 Configuring External Ports on Ethernet Boards Required

When an NE accesses Ethernet
services through the external ports on
the Ethernet board, you need to
configure the attributes of the external
ports so that the external ports can
work with the data communication
equipment on the client side, thus
ensuring the normal accessing of the
Ethernet services.

2 8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Ethernet Boards Required

When an NE transmits Ethernet
services through the internal ports
(that is, VCTRUNK ports) on the
Ethernet board to the SDH side, you
need to configure the attributes of the
VCTRUNK ports so that the
VCTRUNK ports can work with the
Ethernet board on the opposite
equipment. This ensures that the
transmission of the Ethernet services
in the SDH network is normal.

3 8.11 Creating EPLAN Services and EVPLAN Services Required

When an Ethernet switching board
carries LAN services, you need to
create the bridge and set the attributes
of the bridge and the port mounted to
the bridge.

4 8.12 Creating VLANs Filtering Required

In the case of Ethernet LAN services,
when the type of the bridge is IEEE
802.1q or IEEE 802.1ad, the VLAN
filtering table needs to be created for
the bridge if VLANs are used to
isolate the data of different users.

5 Modify Hub/Spoke attribute of mounted ports Optional

In the case of Ethernet LAN services,
you can modify the Hub/Spoke
attribute between access nodes from
the default value of Hub to Spoke,
thus disabling the communication
between the access nodes; however,
the communication between the
access nodes and the convergence
node is enabled.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-31

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Step Operation Remarks

6 8.1 Creating SDH Services Required

This topic describes how to create the
timeslot connections between the
bound paths and the line board, thus
ensuring that the Ethernet services are
transmitted in specified timeslots over
the transmission line.

7 Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Optional

l Creating MAC Address Entries l You can manually specify the port
l Modifying Aging Time of MAC Addresses for forwarding the MAC frames to
create the VLAN unicast entries
l Configuring the STP/RSTP and you can suppress the
l Configuring the IGMP Snooping forwarding of certain MAC
frames to create the MAC address
disabled entries. The manually
created MAC entries are not
affected by the aging time.
l The aging time of the dynamic
MAC address entries of an
Ethernet switching board is five
minutes by default. You can
modify the aging time according
to the actual requirements.
l There may be loops in the network
topology of Ethernet services.
Hence, the STP/RSTP protocol is
enabled to prevent packets from
being proliferated and endlessly
cycled in the loop network.
l When a multicast router is located
on the network, the IEEE 802.1q
or IEEE 802.1ad bridge can enable
the IGMP Snooping protocol to
work with the router, thus
implementing the multicast
function.

8 Configure the QoS Optional

The services of different users need to
share the bandwidth. If the services of
different users need to be configured
with different quality levels, you need
to adopt the corresponding QoS
scheme.

9 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels Required

After the Ethernet services are
created, test the service continuity.

4-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step Operation Remarks

10 8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE Required

Enable the performance monitoring
function for a specific NE. Then, you
can obtain detailed performance
records during the operation process
of this NE. These records can be used
for monitoring and analyzing the
running status of this NE.

11 l 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board Required

l 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Back up the NE database to ensure
Card that the NE can be automatically
l 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF restored after the SCC data is lost or
Card after the equipment is powered off.

4.4 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent

Transmission Board
EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the
bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication
equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support
VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.4.1 Networking Diagram
The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another
station.
4.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and
mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node
communicates with a remote node.
4.4.3 Configuration Process
The Ethernet transparent transmission boards support only EPL services. The EPL services are
already created by default and hence you need not configure the EPL services on the T2000.

4.4.1 Networking Diagram

The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another
station.

Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 4-20, the service requirements are as follows:

l The two branches of user A that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with
each other over Ethernet. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-33

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l The two branches of user B that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with
each other over Ethernet. A 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The service of user A must be isolated from the service of user B.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Figure 4-20 Networking diagram of the EPL services

User A2 User B2

PORT1 PORT2
Line Board 1-JL64
T2000 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6

1
NE3
17

Line Board 1-JL64 NE2 NE4

Line Board 17-JL64

1
NE1
17
Line Board 17-JL64
Ethernet Board 15-EGT6
PORT1 PORT2

VCTRUNK

User A1 User B1

Board Configuration Information

Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used for
configuring EPL services. In this example, NE1 and NE3 are configured with one EGT6 board
each.
NOTE
As described in Table 9-1, the Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL
services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely
than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

4.4.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and
mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node
communicates with a remote node.
The signal flow of the EPL services and the timeslot allocation to the EPL services are shown
in Figure 4-21.

4-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Figure 4-21 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet transparent transmission board)
NE1 EGT6 NE2 NE3 EGT6

PORT1 PORT1
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
User A1 User A2
VC4--xv:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1 VC4--xv:VC4-1
PORT2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
User B1 User B2
VC4--xv:VC4-2 VC4--xv:VC4-2
VC4:VC4-2
VC4--xv:VC4-3 VC4--xv:VC4-3
VC4:VC4-3

SDH

l The EPL services of user A:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 and pass
through NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board
of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE3.
l The EPL services of user B:
– Occupy the second and third VC-4s (VC4:VC4-2 and VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE3 and pass through NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4-
xv:VC4-3) on the EGT6 board of NE1 and the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2
and VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGT6 board of NE3.

Table 4-12 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE3

Board EGT6 EGT6

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full 1000M Full 1000M Full 1000M Full
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length

Table 4-13 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE3

Board EGT6 EGT6

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-35

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter NE1 NE3

Internal Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2

VC4-xv:VC4-3 VC4-xv:VC4-3

4.4.3 Configuration Process

The Ethernet transparent transmission boards support only EPL services. The EPL services are
already created by default and hence you need not configure the EPL services on the T2000.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 4.3.1 Flow of Configuring EPL Services.

Background Information
By default, EPL service connections from external ports to internal ports are already created for
Ethernet transparent transmission boards. The EPL service connections can be queried on the
T2000, but cannot be created, modified, or deleted on the T2000.
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.
l For the EPL services supported by Ethernet transparent transmission boards, see 9.1
Service Support Capability of Ethernet Boards.
l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet transparent transmission boards, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 on the EGT6 board) used
by the services of user A1 and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGT6 and then choose Communication > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

4-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user A1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user B1. In
Disable this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
d Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the Ethernet service access
g Mode Duplex equipment of user A1 and user B1 supports
PORT2: 1000M Full- the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,
Duplex Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
2. Configure the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGT6
board) used by the services of user A1 and user B1.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP In this example, the EGT6 board is used. This
g VCTRUNK2: GFP parameter adopts the default value GFP.
Protocol Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on
the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-37

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click
and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User Configurab VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-21, VCTRUNK1 is

A1← le Ports K1 used by the service between user A1 and user
→user A2.
A2
Avail Le VC4-xv The service between user A1 and user A2 uses
able vel a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
Boun needs to be bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried
by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet Boards.

Se Bidirectio The service between user A1 and user A2 is a

rvi nal bidirectional service.
ce
Di
rec
tio
n

4-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Av VC4-1 For the resources used by the specific boards,

ail see 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths
abl with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
e
Re
so
urc
es

User Configurab VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-21, VCTRUNK2 is

B1← le Ports K2 used by the service between user B1 and user
→user B2.
B2
Avail Se VC4-xv The service between user B1 and user B2 uses
able rvi a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
Boun ce need to be bound.
d Le For the method of calculating the bound
Paths vel timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried
by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet Boards.

Se Bidirectio The service between user B1 and user B2 is a

rvi nal bidirectional service.
ce
Di
rec
tio
n

Av VC4-1, The service between user B1 and user B2 uses

ail VC4-3 a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
abl needs to be bound.
e
Re
so
urc
es

3. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user A1
and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required, and then click Apply. Then, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-39

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

User A1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
A1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the path
bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user A1 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 15-EGT6-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1 The value range of the source VC-4

Timeslot timeslots is consistent with the value of
Range(e.g. Available Resources, which is set for the
1,3-6) paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this
example, the value of Available
Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User B1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
B1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the path
bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user B1 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 15-EGT6-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

4-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Source 2-3 The value range of the source VC-4

Timeslot timeslots is consistent with the value of
Range(e.g. Available Resources, which is set for the
1,3-6) paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this
example, the values of Available
Resources are VC4-2 and VC4-3.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 2-3 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots must be, however, the
same as the number of sink timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 2 Configure the pass-through services for user A1 and user B1 on NE2.

1. Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2, and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
3. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click
Close.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Level VC4 The SDH service of NE1, which passes through NE2, is
at the VC-4 level.

Direction Bidirectional As shown in Figure 4-21, the SDH service from NE1 to
NE2 is a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 4-21, the service signals are
(SDH-1) transmitted from 1-JL64-1(SDH-1) to 17-JL64-1
(SDH-1). In this example, Source Slot is set to 1-JL64-1
(SDH-1).

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-41

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source 1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three
Timeslot VC-4s.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 4-21, the service signals are
(SDH-1) transmitted from 1-JL64-1(SDH-1) to 17-JL64-1
(SDH-1). In this example, Sink Slot is set to 17-JL64-1
(SDH-1).

Sink 1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three
Timeslot VC-4s.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 3 Configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2 on NE3.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2.

Step 4 Check whether the service between user A1 and user A2 and the service between user B1 and
user B2 are correct. For the operation procedure, see 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service
Channels.

Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

4-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

4.5 Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching

Board
EPL services provide the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission solution where the
bandwidth is occupied exclusively. EPL services are applicable when the communication
equipment that is used to access the client-side data in the transmission network does not support
VLAN or when the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.5.1 Networking Diagram
The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another
station.
4.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and
mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node
communicates with a remote node.
4.5.3 Configuration Process
During the configuration of EPL services on Ethernet switching boards, you need to configure
Ethernet private line services. This topic describes the process of configuring Ethernet private
line services for Ethernet switching boards.

4.5.1 Networking Diagram

The completely isolated data services of two users at a station must be transported to another
station.

Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 4-22, the service requirements are as follows:
l The two branches of user A that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with
each other over Ethernet. A 100 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The two branches of user B that are located at NE1 and NE3 need to communicate with
each other over Ethernet. A 200 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The services of user A must be isolated from the services of user B.
l The Ethernet equipment of user A and user B provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-43

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-22 Networking diagram of the EPL services

User A2 User B2

PORT1 PORT2

Line Board 1-JL64

T2000
Ethernet Board 4-EGS8

1
NE3

17

Line Board 1-JL64 NE2 NE4

Line Board 17-JL64

1
NE1
17

Line Board 17-JL64

Ethernet Board 4-EGS8
PORT1 PORT2

VCTRUNK

User A1 User B1

Board Configuration Information

Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used for
configuring EPL services. In this example, NE1 and NE3 are configured with one EGS8 board
each.

NOTE
As described in Table 9-1, the Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL
services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely
than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

4.5.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

Ethernet services are received from an external port, encapsulated through an internal port, and
mapped into the SDH network for transparent transmission. In this manner, the node
communicates with a remote node.
The signal flow of the EPL services and the timeslot allocation to the EPL services are shown
in Figure 4-23.
For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

4-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-23 Signal flow and timeslot allocation (Ethernet switching board)
NE1 EGS8 NE2 NE3 EGS8

PORT1 PORT1
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
User A1 User A2
VC4--xv:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1 VC4--xv:VC4-1
PORT2
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
User B1 User B2
VC4--xv:VC4-2 VC4:VC4-2 VC4--xv:VC4-2
VC4--xv:VC4-3 VC4:VC4-3 VC4--xv:VC4-3

SDH

l The EPL services of user A:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE3 and pass
through NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGS8 board of
NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGS8 board of NE3.
l The EPL services of user B:
– Occupy the second and third VC-4s (VC4:VC4-2 and VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE3 and pass through NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2 and VC4-
xv:VC4-3) on the EGS8 board of NE1 and the second and third VC-4s (VC4-xv:VC4-2
and VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGS8 board of NE3.

Table 4-14 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE3

Board EGS8 EGS8

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full 1000M Full 1000M Full 1000M Full
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Port Type UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 4-15 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE3

Board EGS8 EGS8

Internal Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-45

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter NE1 NE3

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol

Bound Path VC4- VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4- VC4-xv:VC4-2,

xv:VC4-1 and VC4- xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-3
xv:VC4-3

Entry Detection Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Port Type UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 4-16 Parameters of the EPL services

Parameter EPL Services of User A EPL Services of User B

Board EGS8

Service Type EPL

Service Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT2

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) Null Null

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) Null Null

4.5.3 Configuration Process

During the configuration of EPL services on Ethernet switching boards, you need to configure
Ethernet private line services. This topic describes the process of configuring Ethernet private
line services for Ethernet switching boards.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 4.3.1 Flow of Configuring EPL Services.

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.

l For the EPL services supported by Ethernet switching boards, see 9.1 Service Support
Capability of Ethernet Boards.
l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

4-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPL services for user A1 and user B1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGS8 board) used
by the services of user A1 and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 and then choose Communication > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parame Value in This Description

ter Example

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user A1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user B1. In
Disable this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
d Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the Ethernet service access
g Mode Duplex equipment of user A1 and user B1 supports
PORT2: 1000M Full- the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,
Duplex Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

TAG PORT1: Access The access equipment of user A1 and user B1

PORT2: Access does not support VLAN tags. Hence, the
access equipment transmits only the packets
without the VLAN tags. In this example, it is
recommended that you set the TAG flags at
PORT1 and PORT2 to Access.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-47

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Default PORT1: 1 The services of user A1 and user B1

VLAN PORT2: 1 exclusively occupy the PORTs and
ID VCTRUNKs. Hence, the VLAN ID is not
required for isolating the services. In this
example, Default VLAN ID adopts the
default value.

VLAN PORT1: 0 Both the VLAN ID and VLAN priority are

Priority PORT2: 0 not required for user A1 and user B1. In this
example, VLAN Priority adopts the default
value.

Entry PORT1: Disabled The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPL
Detectio PORT2: Disabled transparent transmission services. Hence,
n you need not enable the entry detection
function to check the VLAN tags of the
packets. In this example, Entry Detection
needs to be set to Disabled. When Entry
Detection is set to Disabled, the parameters
of TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN
Priority are invalid.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port PORT1: UNI The UNI interface processes the tag attribute
Type PORT2: UNI of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is,
the UNI interface processes and identifies the
VLAN information of the accessed user
packets, according to the supported tag flag,
namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Configure the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGS8
board) used by the services of user A1 and user B1.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

4-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Entry VCTRUNK1: Disabled The services of user A1 and user B1 are EPL
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Disabled transparent transmission services. Hence,
n you need not enable the entry detection
function to check the VLAN tags of the
packets. In this example, Entry Detection
needs to be set to Disabled. When Entry
Detection is set to Disabled, the parameters
of TAG, Default VLAN ID, and VLAN
Priority are invalid. Hence, it is
recommended that this parameter adopts the
default value.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port PORT1: UNI The UNI interface processes the tag attribute
Type PORT2: UNI of IEEE 802.1q-compliant packets. That is,
the UNI interface processes and identifies the
VLAN information of the accessed user
packets, according to the supported tag flag,
namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP In this example, the EGS8 board is used. This
g VCTRUNK2: GFP parameter adopts the default value GFP.
Protocol Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on
the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-49

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS VCTRUNK2: Enabled enabled.

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
VCTRUNK2: Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time VCTRUNK2: 2000 default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) VCTRUNK2: 300 default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click

4-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation dialog box that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-23, VCTRUNK1 is

A1← e Ports K1 used by the service between user A1 and user
→user A2.
A2
Avail Lev VC4-xv The service between user A1 and user A2
able el uses a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one
Boun VC-4 needs to be bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried
by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirectio The service between user A1 and user A2 is

vice nal a bidirectional service.
Dir
ecti
on

Ava VC4-1 For the resources used by the specific boards,

ilab see 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths
le with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
our
ces

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-23, VCTRUNK2 is

B1← e Ports K2 used by the service between user B1 and user
→user B2.
B2
Avail Lev VC4-xv The service between user B1 and user B2 uses
able el a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
Boun need to be bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried
by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirectio The service between user B1 and user B2 is

vice nal a bidirectional service.
Dir
ecti
on

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-51

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Ava VC4-2, The service between user B1 and user B2 uses

ilab VC4-3 a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
le needs to be bound.
Res
our
ces

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services for user A1 and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 and then choose Communication > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog
box. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

User A1 Service EPL The service of user A1 is an EPL service.

Type

Service Bidirection The service of user A1 is a bidirectional

Direction al service.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. In this example, the service of
user A1 occupies PORT1.

Source C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
VLAN(e.g. the VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
the service of user A1 occupies VCTRUNK1.

Sink C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
VLAN(e.g. the VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

User B1 Service EPL The service of user B1 is an EPL service.

Type

4-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Service Bidirection The service of user B1 is a bidirectional

Direction al service.

Source Port PORT2 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. In this example, the service of
user B1 occupies PORT2.

Source C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
VLAN(e.g. the VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K2 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
the service of user B1 occupies VCTRUNK2.

Sink C- Null In this example, the EPL service does not carry
VLAN(e.g. the VLAN tag.
1, 3-6)

4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user A1
and user B1.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required, and then click Apply. Then, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User A1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
A1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the path
bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user A1 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-53

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Source 1 The value range of the source VC-4

Timeslot timeslots is consistent with the value of
Range(e.g. Available Resources, which is set for the
1,3-6) paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this
example, the value of Available
Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User B1 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
B1 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the path
bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user B1 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 2-3 The value range of the source VC-4

Timeslot timeslots is consistent with the value of
Range(e.g. Available Resources, which is set for the
1,3-6) paths bound with VCTRUNK1. In this
example, the values of Available
Resources are VC4-2 and VC4-3.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

4-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Sink 2-3 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots must be, however, the
same as the number of sink timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 2 Configure the pass-through services for user A1 and user B1 on NE2.

1. Click . Select NE2 in the Navigation Tree that is displayed. Then, click OK.
2. In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
3. Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box. Set
the parameters that are required, and then click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Level VC4 The SDH service of NE1, which passes through NE2, is
at the VC-4 level.

Direction Bidirectional As shown in Figure 4-23, the SDH service from NE1 to
NE2 is a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 1-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 4-23, the service signals are
(SDH-1) transmitted from 1-JL64-1(SDH-1) to 17-JL64-1
(SDH-1). In this example, Source Slot is set to 1-JL64-1
(SDH-1).

Source 1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three
Timeslot VC-4s.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 As shown in Figure 4-23, the service signals are
(SDH-1) transmitted from 1-JL64-1(SDH-1) to 17-JL64-1
(SDH-1). In this example, Sink Slot is set to 17-JL64-1
(SDH-1).

Sink 1-3 The service between user A1 and user B1 occupies three
Timeslot VC-4s.
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-55

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 3 Configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2 on NE3.
Refer to Step 1 and configure the EPL services for user A2 and user B2.
Step 4 Check whether the service between user A1 and user A2 and the service between user B1 and
user B2 are correct. For the operation procedure, see 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service
Channels.
Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

4.6 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services

The PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) service is applicable when the services of multiple users,
which are received from the same external port on the Ethernet board at a station, need to be
transmitted on different VCTRUNKs to another station or to another external port of the station.
4.6.1 Networking Diagram
The services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on an Ethernet
board of a station, need to be transmitted to different stations on different VCTRUNKs.
4.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The Ethernet services wherein different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users,
are received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and then
transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a
remote node.
4.6.3 Configuration Process

4-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Ethernet switching boards are required for creating EVPL services of different VLAN IDs on
NE1. In this manner, the data of different users, which are received from the same external port,
can be differentiated. Ethernet transparent transmission boards are required for creating EPL
transparent transmission services on NE2 and NE4.

4.6.1 Networking Diagram

The services of multiple users, which are received from the same external port on an Ethernet
board of a station, need to be transmitted to different stations on different VCTRUNKs.

Service Requirement
On the network shown in Figure 4-24, the service requirements are as follows:
l The headquarters C1 of user C is located at NE1. Two branches (C2 and C3) of user C are
located at NE2 and NE4. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the VLAN of
which the VLAN ID is 100. The services between C1 and C3 are transmitted in the VLAN
of which the VLAN ID is 200.
l The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 require
a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.
l The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces
that work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The Ethernet equipment of C1 supports VLAN tags,
but the Ethernet equipment of C2 and C3 does not support VLAN tags.
– The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C2 is 100.
– The VLAN ID used by the Ethernet services between C1 and C3 is 200.

Figure 4-24 Networking diagram for configuring PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

T2000

Line Board 1-JL64 NE3 Line Board 17-JL64

Ethernet Board 15-EGT6 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6

NE2 NE4
PORT1 PORT1
User C3
User C2 1 17
NE1

17 1
VLAN 100
Line Board 17-JL64
PORT1
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK Line Board 1-JL64
Ethernet Board 4-EGS8
User
C1

Board Configuration Information

In this example, NE1 is configured with an EGS8 board. VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data
of different users that are received from the same port. NE2 and NE4 are configured with an

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-57

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

EGT6 board each. The EPL services are configured to implement service transparent
transmission from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

NOTE
As described in Table 9-1, the Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL
services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely
than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

4.6.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The Ethernet services wherein different VLAN IDs are used to isolate the data of different users,
are received from the same external port of NE1, encapsulated through an internal port, and then
transparently transmitted on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a
remote node.
Figure 4-25 shows the signal flow of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the timeslot
allocation to the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.
For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Figure 4-25 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE2:EGT6

VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1

NE1:EGS8 4-1 User C2
:VC VC4-xv:VC4-1
VC4
VCTRUNK1
EVPL1
PORT1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User C1
VCTRUNK2
EVPL2 VC
VC4-xv:VC4-2 4 :VC NE4:EGT6
4-1

VCTRUNK1 EPL PORT1

User C3
VC4-xv:VC4-1

SDH

l The EVPL service from C1 to C2:

– Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
– Is added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGS8 board of
NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.
l The EVPL service from C1 to C3:
– Occupies the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.
– Is added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGS8 board
of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

4-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-17 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

Maximum Frame 1522 1522 1522

Length

TAG Tag Aware - -

Entry Detection Enabled - -

Port Type UNI - -

Table 4-18 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol

TAG Access Access - -

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -

Default VLAN 100 200

ID

VLAN Priority 0 0

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI - -

Table 4-19 Parameters of the PORT-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1

EVPL1 EVPL2
(PORT1←→VCTRUNK1 (PORT1←→VCTRUNK2
) )

Board EGS8

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-59

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter NE1

EVPL1 EVPL2
(PORT1←→VCTRUNK1 (PORT1←→VCTRUNK2
) )

Service Type EVPL

Service Direction Bidirectional

Source Port PORT1 PORT1

Source C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100 200

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

Sink C-VLAN(e.g.1, 3-6) 100 200

4.6.3 Configuration Process

Ethernet switching boards are required for creating EVPL services of different VLAN IDs on
NE1. In this manner, the data of different users, which are received from the same external port,
can be differentiated. Ethernet transparent transmission boards are required for creating EPL
transparent transmission services on NE2 and NE4.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 4.3.2 Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.
l The Ethernet switching boards that support EVPL services are provided in 9.1 Service
Support Capability of Ethernet Boards.
l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user C1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGS8 board) used by the service
of user C1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 and then choose Communication > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

4-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled The service of user C1 occupies PORT1. In

/ this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disable Enabled.
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet service access equipment of

g Mode Duplex user C1 supports the 1000M full-duplex
mode. In this example, Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

TAG PORT1: Tag Aware When the port is set to Tag Aware, all data
frames transmitted and received at the port
must carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware.

Default - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

VLAN not set Default VLAN ID.
ID

VLAN - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

Priority not set VLAN Priority.

Entry PORT1: Enabled The equipment of user C1 supports VLAN

Detectio tags. Hence, the entry detection function
n must be enabled to check whether the data
frames carry VLAN tags. In this manner, the
user data frames with different VLAN tags
can be distinguished at one port. In this
example, Entry Detection of PORT1 is set
to Enabled.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-61

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Port PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGS8 board)
used by the services between user C1 and user C2 and between user C1 and user C3.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

TAG VCTRUNK1: Access This parameter is set to Access if the Ethernet

VCTRUNK2: Access equipment of user C2 and user C3 does not
support VLAN tags and if the transmitted
packets do not carry VLAN tags.

Default VCTRUNK1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN VCTRUNK2: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user C1 and user
C2.
The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the
transmission network side for the Ethernet
services between user C1 and user C3.

VLAN VCTRUNK1: 0 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority VCTRUNK2: 0 default value.

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between

Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled user C1 and user C2. VCTRUNK2 is used by
n the service between user C1 and user C3. In
this example, the entry detection function
must be enabled to check whether the
received packets carry VLAN tags.

4-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type VCTRUNK2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on

g VCTRUNK2: GFP the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Protocol equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-63

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS VCTRUNK2: Enabled enabled.

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
VCTRUNK2: Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time VCTRUNK2: 2000 default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) VCTRUNK2: 300 default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click
and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-25, VCTRUNK1 is

C1← e Ports K1 used by the service between user C1 and user
→user C2.
C2
Availa Le VC4-xv The service between user C1 and user C2 uses
ble vel a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
Bound needs to be bound.
Paths For the method of calculating the bound
timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

4-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Se Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C2 is a

rvi al bidirectional service.
ce
Di
rec
tio
n

Av VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is set

ail to VC4-1.
abl
e For the resources used by other boards, see
Re 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
so VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
ur
ce
s

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-25, VCTRUNK2 is

C1← e Ports K2 used by the service between user C1 and user
→user C3.
C3
Availa Le VC4-xv The service between user C1 and user C3 uses
ble vel a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
Bound needs to be bound.
Paths For the method of calculating the bound
timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Se Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C3 is a

rvi al bidirectional service.
ce
Di
rec
tio
n

Av VC4-2 In this example, Available Resources is set

ail to VC4-2.
abl For the resources used by other boards, see
e 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
Re VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
so
ur
ce
s

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-65

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user C1 and user C2 and between user
C1 and user C3.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog
box. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

User Service EPL The service between user C1 and C2 is a point-

C1←→u Type to-point Ethernet private line service.
ser C2
Service Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C2 is a
Direction al bidirectional service.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. PORT1 is the external port
used by the service between user C1 and user
C2.

Source C- 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 100 for the Ethernet service between user C1
1, 3-6) and user C2.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK1 is
the internal port used by the service between
user C1 and user C2.

Sink C- 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 100 for the Ethernet service between user C1
1, 3-6) and user C2.

User C1 Service EPL The service between user C1 and user C3 is a

←→user Type point-to-point Ethernet private line service.
C3
Service Bidirection The service between user C1 and user C3 is a
Direction al bidirectional service.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. PORT1 is the external port
used by the service between user C1 and user
C3.

4-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Source C- 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 200 for the Ethernet service between user C1
1, 3-6) and user C3.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K2 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. VCTRUNK2 is
the internal port used by the service between
user C1 and user C2.

Sink C- 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 200 for the Ethernet service between user C1
1, 3-6) and user C3.

4. Configure the cross-connections from Ethernet services (between user C1 and user C2 and
between user C1 and user C3) to the SDH links.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the service

C1←→ between user C1 and user C2 is at the VC-4
user C2 level. The service level must be consistent
with the level of the paths bound with the
VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service between user C1 and user C2 is

l a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-67

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service

C1←→ between user C1 and user C3 is at the VC-4
user C3 level. The service level must be consistent
with the level of the paths bound with the
VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service between user C1 and user C3 is

l a bidirectional service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 2 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK2. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-2.

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

4-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.

NOTE
The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See 4.4
Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board to set the parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see 8.15
Testing Ethernet Service Channels.
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C2, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGS8 board.
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters C1 and branch C3, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 200 for PORT1 on the EGS8 board.
NOTE

After the test, change the parameter values back to the values specified in the service configuration.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

4.7 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL (VLAN) Services

When the services of multiple users that do not carry VLAN tags are accessed into a transmission
network and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN)
service is used to isolate the services of different users by adding VLAN tags. In this manner,
the bandwidth is shared on the SDH side.
4.7.1 Networking Diagram
The services of multiple Ethernet users are accessed on the same station, transmitted on the same
VCTRUNK, and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared
on the SDH side.
4.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The services of multiple users are received from different external ports on an Ethernet board,
tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner,

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-69

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node,
the VLAN tags are stripped.
4.7.3 Configuration Process
Ethernet switching boards are required on both the source and sink nodes for creating EVPL
services with different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the packets received from different external
ports are added with different VLAN tags. As a result, the services of different users are isolated
from each other when they are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

4.7.1 Networking Diagram

The services of multiple Ethernet users are accessed on the same station, transmitted on the same
VCTRUNK, and isolated by using different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the bandwidth is shared
on the SDH side.

Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 4-26, the service requirements are as follows:
l Two branches of user D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l Two branches of user E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l The services of user D need to be isolated from the services of user E. The traffic of user
D and the traffic of user E, however, occupy a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth during different time
period.
l The Ethernet equipment of user D and user E provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Figure 4-26 Networking diagram for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

T2000

Line Board 1-JL64

Ethernet Board NE3
4-EGS8

PORT1
NE2 NE4

User D2 PORT2 1
NE1

17
PORT1 PORT2 User E1
User E2

Line Board 17-JL64

VCTRUNK Ethernet Board 4-EGS8
User D1

4-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Board Configuration Information

The Ethernet switching boards that support EVPL services are provided in Table 9-1.

In this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with an EGS8 board. Different VLAN IDs
are used to isolate the data of different users transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

l When the data of user D is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 100
is added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the
VLAN tag is stripped.
l When the data of user E is accessed into the transmission network, the VLAN ID of 200 is
added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the VLAN
tag is stripped.

4.7.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The services of multiple users are received from different external ports on an Ethernet board,
tagged with different VLAN IDs, and then transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner,
the services of different users are isolated from each other. After the data arrives at the sink node,
the VLAN tags are stripped.

Figure 4-27 shows the signal flow of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services and the
timeslot allocation to the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services.

For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Figure 4-27 Signal flow and timeslot allocation

NE1:EGS8 NE2:EGS8

PORT1 PORT1
User D1 EVPL1 EVPL1 User D2
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 PORT2
VC4:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User E1 EVPL2 EVPL2 User E2

SDH

l The EVPL services of user D and user E that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4
(VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
l The EVPL services are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the
EGS8 board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGS8 board of NE2.

Table 4-20 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGS8 EGS8

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-71

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter NE1 NE2

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length

TAG Access Access Access Access

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Default VLAN 100 200 100 200

ID

VLAN Priority 0 0 0 0

Port Type UNI UNI UNI UNI

Table 4-21 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGS8 EGS8

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol GFP GFP

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI

Table 4-22 Parameters of the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL (VLAN) services

Parameter NE1 NE2

EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2

PORT1←→V PORT2←→V PORT1←→V PORT2←→V
CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1

Board EGS8 EGS8

Service Type EVPL EVPL

Service Bidirectional Bidirectional

Direction

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

4-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter NE1 NE2

EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2

PORT1←→V PORT2←→V PORT1←→V PORT2←→V
CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1

Source C- 100 200 100 200

VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN 100 200 100 200

(e.g.1, 3-6)

4.7.3 Configuration Process

Ethernet switching boards are required on both the source and sink nodes for creating EVPL
services with different VLAN IDs. In this manner, the packets received from different external
ports are added with different VLAN tags. As a result, the services of different users are isolated
from each other when they are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.

You must be familiar with 4.3.2 Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.

l The Ethernet switching boards that support EVPL services are provided in 9.1 Service
Support Capability of Ethernet Boards.

l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user D1 and user E1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGS8 board) used
by the services of user D1 and user E1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-73

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user D1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user E1. In
Disable this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
d Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet service access equipment of

g Mode Duplex user D1 and user E1 supports the 1000M full-
PORT2: 1000M Full- duplex mode. In this example, Working
Duplex Mode is set to 1000M Full-Duplex.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

TAG PORT1: Access In this example, TAG is set to Access,

PORT2: Access because the Ethernet equipment of user D1
and user E1 does not support VLAN tag.
When TAG is set to Access for a port, only
the data packets that do not carry VLAN tags
can enter the port.

Default PORT1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN PORT2: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user D1 and user
D2.
The VLAN ID is set to 200 on the
transmission network side for the Ethernet
services between user E1 and user E2.

VLAN PORT1: 0 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority PORT2: 0 default value.

4-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Entry PORT1: Enabled The equipment of user D1 and user E1 does

Detectio PORT2: Enabled not support VLAN tags. Hence, the entry
n detection function must be enabled to check
whether the received packets carry VLAN
tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set
to Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type PORT2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGS8 board) used by the services
between user D1 and user D2 and between E1 and user E2.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware When the port is set to Tag Aware, all data
frames transmitted and received at the port
must carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware.

Default - When TAG is set to TAG Aware, you need

VLAN not set Default VLAN ID.
ID

VLAN - When TAG is set to TAG Aware, you need

Priority not set VLAN Priority.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-75

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled VCTRUNK1 is used by the service between

Detectio user D1 and user D2 and the service between
n user E1 and user E2. In this example, the
entry detection function must be enabled to
check whether the received packets carry
VLAN tags.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on

g the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Protocol equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

4-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS enabled.

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click
and click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-77

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

User Configura VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-27, VCTRUNK1 is used

D1← ble Ports K1 by the service between user D1 and user D2
→user and the service between user E1 and user E2.
D2
Avai Le VC4-xv The service between user D1 and user D2 and
User
lable ve the service between user E1 and user E2 share
E1←
Bou l a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4
→user
nd needs to be bound.
E2
Path For the method of calculating the bound
s timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Se Bidirection The service between user D1 and user D2 and

rvi al the service between user E1 and user E2 are
ce bidirectional services.
Di
re
cti
on

A VC4-1 In this example, Available Resources is

va VC4-1.
ila For the resources used by other boards, see 9.2
bl Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Re
so
ur
ce
s

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user D1 and user D2 and between user
E1 and user E2.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click New on the lower-right pane to display the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog
box. Set the following parameters, and then click OK. The Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

4-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

User Service EPL The service between user D1 and user D2 is a

D1←→u Type point-to-point Ethernet private line service.
ser D2
Service Bidirection The service between user D1 and user D2 is a
Direction al bidirectional service.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. In this example, PORT1 is the
external port used by the service between user
D1 and user D2.

Source C- 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 100 on the transmission network side for the
1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user D1 and user D2.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the
service between user D1 and user D2.

Sink C- 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 100 on the transmission network side for the
1, 3-6) Ethernet services between user D1 and user D2.

User Service EPL The service between user E1 and user E2 is a

E1←→u Type point-to-point Ethernet private line service.
ser E2
Service Bidirection The service between user E1 and user E2 is a
Direction al bidirectional service.

Source Port PORT2 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT as
the source port. In this example, PORT2 is the
external port used by the service between user
E1 and user E2.

Source C- 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 200 on the transmission network side for the
1, 3-6) Ethernet service between user E1 and user E2.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the
service between user E1 and user E2.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-79

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink C- 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN(e.g. 200 on the transmission network side for the
1, 3-6) Ethernet service between user E1 and user E2.

4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user D1
and user E1.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the service

D1←→ between user D1 and user D2 and the
user D2 service between user E1 and user E2 are at
User the VC-4 level. The service level must be
E1←→ consistent with the level of the paths bound
user E2 with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service between user D1 and user D2

l and the service between user E1 and user
E2 are bidirectional services.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

4-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE1.
Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see 8.15
Testing Ethernet Service Channels.
l Test the service connectivity between user D1 and user D2.
l Test the service connectivity between user E1 and user E2.
Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

4.8 Configuring EVPL (QinQ) Services

The EVPL (QinQ) service provides an Ethernet private line solution. The services are applicable
where the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed into a transmission
network and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In the case of EVPL (QinQ)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-81

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

services, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added on the network side to isolate the services of different
users from each other.
4.8.1 Networking Diagram
When the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the same
station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added to
isolate the services of different users from each other.
4.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through different
external ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are added
to the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink node, the S-
VLAN tags are stripped.
4.8.3 Configuration Process
The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source
and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different
S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and
are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

4.8.1 Networking Diagram

When the services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed on the same
station and need to be transmitted on the same VCTRUNK, a layer of S-VLAN tag is added to
isolate the services of different users from each other.

Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 4-28, the service requirements are as follows:
l Two branches of user J are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l Two branches of user K are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with each
other.
l The services of user J need to be isolated from the services of user K. The traffic of user J
and the traffic of user K, however, occupy a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth during different time
periods.
l The Ethernet equipment of user J and user K provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode. The services of all the users have the same
VLAN ID of 100 and are accessed into the transmission network.

4-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-28 Networking diagram of the EVPL (QinQ) services

T2000

Line Board 1-JL64 NE3

Ethernet Board 4-EGS8

PORT1 NE2 NE4

VLAN 100

User J2 PORT2 1
VLAN 100
NE1

17 PORT2
User K2 VLAN 100

Line Board 17-JL64 PORT1 User K1

Ethernet Board 4-EGS8 VLAN 100

VCTRUNK

User J1

Board Configuration Information

The Ethernet switching boards that support EVPL (QinQ) services are provided in Table 9-1.
In this example, NE1 and NE2 are each configured with one EGS8 board, which is an Ethernet
switching board supporting the QinQ function. Two layers of VLAN tags are added to isolate
the services of different users from each other.
l When the data of user J is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are
added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the S-
VLAN tags are stripped.
l When the data of user K is accessed into the transmission network, the S-VLAN tags are
added to the data. When the data is transmitted out of the transmission network, the S-
VLAN tags are stripped.

4.8.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The services of multiple users that have the same VLAN ID are accessed through different
external ports of the Ethernet board on the source node. After different S-VLAN tags are added
to the services, the services are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other. After the services arrive at the sink node, the S-
VLAN tags are stripped.
Figure 4-29 shows the signal flow of the EVPL (QinQ) services and the timeslot allocation to
the EVPL (QinQ) services.
For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-83

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-29 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

NE1:EGS8 NE2:EGS8

PORT1 PORT1 User J2

User J1 EVPL1 EVPL1
VLAN 100 VLAN 100
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1 PORT2
User K1 User K2
VLAN 100 EVPL2 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2 EVPL2 VLAN 100

SDH

PORT VCTRUNK

Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100) User J1 S-VLAN(10) C-VLAN(100) User J1 C-VLAN(100) User J1

C-VLAN(100) User K1 S-VLAN(20) C-VLAN(100) User K1 C-VLAN(100) User K1

l The EVPL services of user J and user K that share VCTRUNK1 occupy the first VC-4
(VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2.
l The EVPL services of user J and user K are added and dropped by using the first VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGS8 board of NE1 and the
first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGS8 board of NE2.

Table 4-23 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGS8 EGS8

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length

Port Type C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware C-Aware

Table 4-24 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2

Board EGS8 EGS8

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping Protocol GFP GFP

Port Type S-Aware S-Aware

4-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter NE1 NE2

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4- VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-

xv:VC4-2 xv:VC4-2

Table 4-25 Parameters of the EVPL (QinQ) services

Parameter NE1 NE2

EVPL1 EVPL2 EVPL1 EVPL2

PORT1←→V PORT2←→V PORT1←→V PORT2←→V
CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1 CTRUNK1

Board EGS8 EGS8

Service Type EVPL(QinQ) EVPL(QinQ)

Service Bidirectional Bidirectional

Direction

Operation Type Add S-VLAN Add S-VLAN

Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Source C- 100 100 100 100

VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)

Source S- - - - -
VLAN

Sink Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Sink C-VLAN 100 100 100 100

(e.g.1, 3-6)

Sink S-VLAN 10 20 10 20

C-VLAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Priority

S-VLAN AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

Priority

4.8.3 Configuration Process

The Ethernet switching boards supporting the QinQ function need to be installed at the source
and sink nodes and need to be configured with the EVPL services of different users. Different
S-VLAN tags are added to the services of different users that have the same C-VLAN ID and
are accessed through different ports on the Ethernet switching boards. In this manner, the services
of different users are isolated from each other and are transmitted on the same VCTRUNK.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-85

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.

You must be familiar with 4.3.2 Flow of Configuring EVPL Services.

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.

l For the Ethernet switching boards that EVPL services support, see 9.1 Service Support
Capability of Ethernet Boards.

l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPL services for user J1 and user K1 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGS8 board) used
by the services of user J1 and user K1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled PORT1 is used by the service of user J1.

/ PORT2: Enabled PORT2 is used by the service of user K1. In
Disable this example, Enabled/Disabled is set to
d Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the Ethernet service access
g Mode Duplex equipment of user J1 and user K1 supports
PORT2: 1000M Full- the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,
Duplex Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

4-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
Parameter Value in This Example Description

Port Type PORT1: C-Aware The C-Aware port is used for

PORT2: C-Aware connecting to the client network, and
identifies and processes the packets
that carry C-VLAN tags.

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG
Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page
need not be set.
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Set the attributes of the internal port (VCTRUNK1 on the EGS8 board) used by the service
between user J1 and user J2 and the service between K1 and user K2.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: S-Aware The S-Aware port is used for connecting to

Type VCTRUNK2: S-Aware the supplier network, and identifies and
processes the packets that carry S-VLAN
tags.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-87

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on

g the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Protocol equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS enabled.

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

4-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the
Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click
Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User Configurab VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-29, VCTRUNK1 is

J1←→ le Ports K1 used by the service between user J1 and user
user J2 J2 and the service between user K1 and user
User K2.
K1←
Ava Lev VC4-xv The service between user J1 and user J2 and
→user
ilabl el the service between user K1 and user K2 share
K2
e a 200 Mbit/s bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s
Bou need to be bound.
nd For the method of calculating the bound
Path timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
s 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirection The service between user J1 and user J2 and

vice al the service between user K1 and user K2 are
Dir bidirectional services.
ecti
on

Ava VC4-1, In this example, the first and second VC-4s of

ilab VC4-2 the EGS8 board are bound.
le For the resources used by other boards, see 9.2
Res Requirements for Binding Paths with
our VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
ces

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-89

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG
Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page
need not be set.
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Configure the Ethernet private line services between user J1 and user J2 and between user
K1 and user K2.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
l Select Display QinQ Shared Service on the lower-right pane. Then, click New.
l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. Click Close.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User Service EVPL The service between user J1 and user J2 is an

J1←→u Type (QinQ) EVPL (QinQ) service.
ser J2
Service Bidirectio The service between user J1 and user J2 is a
Direction nal bidirectional service.

Operation Add S- The service between user J1 and user J2 and

Type VLAN the service between user K1 and user K2
carry the same C-VLAN tag. Hence, a layer
of S-VLAN tag needs to be added to isolate
the services of different users.

Source Port PORT1 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT
as the source port. In this example, PORT1
is the external port used by the service
between user J1 and user J2.

Source C- 100 The Ethernet service of user J1 carries the C-

VLAN(e.g. VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)

Source S- - The data packets that are accessed into the

VLAN external port carry the C-VLAN tags but do
not carry the S-VLAN tags.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the
service between user J1 and user J2.

4-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Sink C- 100 The Ethernet service of user J2 carries the C-

VLAN(e.g. VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)

Sink S- 10 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 10

VLAN needs to be added to the service between user
J1 and user J2.

C-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority default value.

S-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority default value.

User Service Bidirectio The service between user K1 and user K2 is

K1←→ Direction nal a bidirectional service.
user K2
Operation Add S- The service between user J1 and user J2 and
Type VLAN the service between user K1 and user K2
carry the same C-VLAN tag. Hence, a layer
of S-VLAN tag needs to be added to isolate
the services of different users.

Source Port PORT2 When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific PORT
as the source port. In this example, PORT2
is the external port used by the service
between user K1 and user K2.

Source C- 100 The Ethernet service of user K1 carries the

VLAN(e.g. C-VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)

Source S- - The data packets that are accessed into the

VLAN external port carry the C-VLAN tags but do
not carry the S-VLAN tags.

Sink Port VCTRUN When creating the bidirectional Ethernet

K1 service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it is
recommended that you use a specific
VCTRUNK as the sink port. In this example,
VCTRUNK1 is the internal port used by the
service between user K1 and user K2.

Sink C- 100 The Ethernet service of user K2 carries the

VLAN(e.g. C-VLAN ID of 100.
1, 3-6)

Sink S- 20 According to the plan, the S-VLAN ID of 20

VLAN needs to be added to the service between user
K1 and user K2.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-91

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

C-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority default value.

S-VLAN AUTO In this example, this parameter adopts the

Priority default value.

4. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user J1
and user K1.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User Level VC4 The timeslots bound with the service

J1←→u between user J1 and user J2 and the service
ser J2 between user K1 and user K2 are at the
User VC-4 level. The service level must be
K1←→ consistent with the level of the paths bound
user K2 with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service between user J1 and user J2 and

l the service between user K1 and user K2 are
bidirectional services.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1-2 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
values of Available Resources are VC4-1
and VC4-2.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

4-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Sink 1-2 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 2 Configure the EVPL service of NE2.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the EVPL service of NE2. The procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE2 are the same as the procedures and parameters for
configuring the EVPL service of NE1.

Step 3 Check whether the services between NE1 and NE2 are configured correctly. For the operation
procedures, see 8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels.
l Before testing the service connectivity between user J1 and user J2, set TAG to Access and
Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT1 on the EGS8 board.
l Before testing the service connectivity between user K1 and user K2, set TAG to Access and
Default VLAN ID to 100 for PORT2 on the EGS8 board.
NOTE

After the test, change the parameter values back to the values specified in the service configuration.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-93

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.9 Configuring EPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1d Bridge)

The EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-multipoint
convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication equipment
connected to the transmission network does not support VLAN tags or where the VLAN planning
cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.9.1 Networking Diagram
The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.
4.9.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded to
an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on the
SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
4.9.3 Configuration Process
At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At
the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparent transmission EPL
services.

4.9.1 Networking Diagram

The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
The two access nodes need not communicate with each other.

Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 4-30, the service requirements are as follows:
l Three branches (F1, F2, and F3) of user F are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4. F1 needs to
communicate with F2 and F3, and requires a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth for communication
with each branch.
l The Ethernet equipment of user F provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces that
work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags. The VLAN IDs and the number
of VLANs, however, are unknown and may be changed.
NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:
l Branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other.
l Branches F2 and F3 need not communicate with each other.
If branches F2 and F3 need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.4.

4-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Figure 4-30 Networking diagram for configuring EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

NE3
T2000

Line Board 1-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64

Ethernet Board 15-EGT6 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6

NE2 NE4
1 NE1 17
PORT1 PORT1
17 1
F2 F3
PORT1 Line Board 1-JL64
VB Line Board 17-JL64
VCTRUNK VCTRUNK Ethernet Board 4-EGS8
1 2 F1
PORT1
VCTRUNK

Board Configuration Information

For Ethernet switching boards that support the EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d bridge) services, refer to
Table 9-1.

In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGS8 board that supports the
IEEE 802.1d bridge, thus implementing EPLAN services wherein user VLANs are not limited.

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each. The EPL services are
configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

NOTE
As described in Table 9-1, the Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL
services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely
than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

4.9.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port, forwarded to
an internal port through Layer 2 switching, encapsulated, and transparently transmitted on the
SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 4-31 shows the signal flow of the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge) and the timeslot
allocation to the EPLAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge).

For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-95

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Figure 4-31 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation

NE2:EGT6

VCTRUNK1 PORT1
NE1:EGS8 User F2
VC4-xv:VC4-1

C 4-1
VCTRUNK1 4:V
VC
PORT1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
User F1
VCTRUNK2
V C4 NE4:EGT6
VC4-xv:VC4-2 :VC
4-1
VB1
VCTRUNK1 PORT1
User F3
VC4-xv:VC4-1

SDH

l The Ethernet LAN services of user F occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE2 and the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1
and NE4.
l The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE2 are added and dropped by using the
first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGS8 board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1)
on the EGT6 board of NE2.
l The Ethernet LAN services between NE1 and NE4 are added and dropped by using the
second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGS8 board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-
xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

Table 4-26 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Working Mode 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

Maximum Frame 1522 1522 1522

Length

Entry Detection Enabled - -

TAG Tag Aware

Port Type UNI - -

Table 4-27 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

4-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol

Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1 VC4-xv:VC4-1

Port Type UNI UNI - -

Table 4-28 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1d bridge)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGS8

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1d

Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable

Bridge Learning Mode SVL

Ingress Filter Disabled

VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

VCTRUNK1 Spoke

VCTRUNK2 Spoke

4.9.3 Configuration Process

At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EPLAN service (IEEE 802.1d bridge). At
the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure only transparent transmission EPL
services.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 4.3.3 Flow of Configuring EPLAN Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-97

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.

l For the EPLAN services supported by Ethernet switching boards, see 9.1 Service Support
Capability of Ethernet Boards.
l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EPLAN services for user F1, user F2, and user F3 on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external port (PORT1 of the EGS8 board) used by the service
of user F1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parame Value in This Description

ter Example

Enabled PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 carries the services

/ and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
Disable PORT1.
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- The Ethernet service access equipment of

g Mode Duplex user F1 supports the 1000M full-duplex
mode. In this example, Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

4-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

TAG PORT1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user F1

supports VLAN tags and the transmitted data
frames carry VLAN tags. In this example,
TAG is set to Tag Aware for PORT1.

Default - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

VLAN not set Default VLAN ID.
ID

VLAN - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

Priority not set VLAN Priority.

Entry PORT1: Enabled If the packets of user F1 carry VLAN tags,

Detectio the entry detection function must be enabled
n to check whether the packets carry VLAN
tags. In this example, Entry Detection is set
to Enabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGS8 board)
used by the services of user F2 and user F3 on NE1.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-99

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

TAG VCTRUNK1: Tag Aware The service access equipment of user F2 and
VCTRUNK2: Tag Aware user F3 supports VLAN tags and the
transmitted data frames carry VLAN tags. In
this example, TAG is set to Tag Aware for
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.

Default - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

VLAN not set Default VLAN ID.
ID

VLAN - When TAG is set to Tag Aware, you need

Priority not set VLAN Priority.

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled If the packets of user F2 and user F3 carry

Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled VLAN tags, the entry detection function
n must be enabled to check the VLAN tags of
the packets. In this example, Entry
Detection is set to Enabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type VCTRUNK2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP In this example, the EGS8 board is used. This
g VCTRUNK2: GFP parameter adopts the default value GFP.
Protocol Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on
the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

4-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS VCTRUNK2: Enabled enabled.

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
VCTRUNK2: Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time VCTRUNK2: 2000 default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) VCTRUNK2: 300 default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-101

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click
and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-31, VCTRUNK1 of

F2 e Ports K1 the EGS8 board is used by the service of user
F2.

Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user F2 uses a 100 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Boun bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirectio The service of user F2 is a bidirectional

vic nal service.
e
Dir
ecti
on

Av VC4-1 For the resources used by other boards, see

aila 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
ble VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
our
ces

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-31, VCTRUNK2 of

F3 e Ports K2 the EGS8 board is used by the service of user
F3.

4-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user F3 uses a 100 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Boun bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirectio The service of user F3 is a bidirectional

vic nal service.
e
Dir
ecti
on

Av VC4-2 For the resources used by other boards, see

aila 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
ble VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
our
ces

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Create a bridge for the EGS8 board on NE1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
l Click New.
l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describe

the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-103

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

VB Type 802.1d The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge learns and forwards
the packets according to the MAC addresses of the
user packets. The information in the VLAN tags of
the user packets, however, is not considered in the
learning and forwarding process. The IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge is used when the entire information of
the VLANs used by the client cannot be learned or
when the data between the VLANs of the client need
not be isolated.

Bridge SVL/Ingress When the bridge adopts the SVL learning mode, all
Switch Filter the VLANs share the same MAC address table. That
Mode Disable is, the bridge learns and forwards the packets
according to the MAC addresses of the user packets
only. The information in the VLAN tags of the user
packets, however, is not considered in the learning
and forwarding process.

Bridge SVL -
Learning
Mode

Ingress Filter Disabled The IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge does not detect the
VLAN tags of the received packets.

MAC Enabled When MAC Address Self-learning is set to

Address Enabled, the bridge can learn the MAC address.
Self-learning

l Click Configure Mount.

l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 in the Service Mount Configuration
dialog box that is displayed. Then, click .
l Click OK.
l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Click Close.
4. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user F2 and user F3, proceed to Step 1.5.
l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting
the parameters, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

4-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub If user F1 needs to communicate with user F2 and

VCTRUNK user F3, Hub/Spoke of PORT1 that accesses the
1: Spoke services of user F1 is set to Hub. A port of the
Hub attribute can communicate with a port of the
VCTRUNK Spoke or Hub attribute.
2: Spoke
If user F2 need not communicate with user F3, set
the two VCTRUNKs that access the services of users
F2 and F3 to Spoke. Ports of the Spoke attribute
cannot communicate with each other.

5. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user F2
and user F3.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User F2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
F2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the paths
bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user F2 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

Slot (SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-105

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value range
Range(e.g. of the source timeslots. The number of sink
1,3-6) timeslots, however, must be consistent with
the number of source timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediate
ly

User F3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
F3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the paths
bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user F3 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

Slot (SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 2 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK2. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-2.

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value range
Range(e.g. of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the same
as the number of source timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediate
ly

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.

NOTE
The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See 4.4
Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board to set the parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see 8.15
Testing Ethernet Service Channels.

4-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F2, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 of the EGS8 board.
l Before testing the service connectivity between headquarters F1 and branch F3, set TAG to
Access and Default VLAN ID to 1 for PORT1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGS8 board.
NOTE

After the test, change the parameter values back to the values specified in the service configuration.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

4.10 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1q Bridge)

The EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge) provides a LAN solution for multipoint-to-
multipoint convergence. This service is applicable where the user-side data communication
equipment, which is connected to the transmission network, does not support VLAN tags or
where the VLAN planning cannot be disclosed to the network operator.
4.10.1 Networking Diagram
The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
LAN services of two users need to be isolated.
4.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through
Layer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted
on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.
4.10.3 Configuration Process
At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparent
transmission EPL services only.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-107

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

4.10.1 Networking Diagram

The convergence node needs to exchange Ethernet services with two access nodes at Layer 2.
LAN services of two users need to be isolated.

Service Requirement
On the network as shown in Figure 4-32, the service requirements are as follows:
l Three branches (G1, G2, and G3) of user G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.
The branches need to form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth. G2 and G3 need not
communicate with each other.
l Three branches (H1, H2, and H3) of user H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE4 respectively.
The branches need to form a LAN and share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The services of user G must be isolated from the services of user H.
l The Ethernet equipment of user G and user H provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet optical
interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and do not support VLAN tags.

Figure 4-32 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

NE3
T2000

Line Board 1-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64

Ethernet Board 15-EGT6 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6
PORT2 PORT2
H2 NE2 NE4
H3
PORT1 1 NE1 PORT1
17
G2 G3
17 1
H1 G1
PORT2 PORT1
Line Board 1-JL64
VCTRUNK
Line Board 17-JL64
Ethernet Board 4-EGS8

VB1 VLAN 200 VB1 VLAN 100

VCTRUNK3 VCTRUNK4 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT2 PORT1

Board Configuration Information

For the EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q bridge) services supported by Ethernet switching boards, refer
to Table 9-1.
In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGS8 board that supports the
IEEE 802.1q bridge, thus implementing EVPLAN services wherein services of different users
are isolated from each other.

4-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each. The EPL services are
configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.

NOTE
As described in Table 9-1, the Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL
services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely
than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

4.10.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The Ethernet services of the convergence node are received from an external port and tagged
with the corresponding VLAN IDs. After the services are forwarded to an internal port through
Layer 2 switching, the VLAN tags are stripped and then the services are transparently transmitted
on the SDH network. In this manner, the node communicates with a remote node.

Figure 4-33 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge).

For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Figure 4-33 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation

NE2:EGT6

VCTRUNK1 PORT1
User G2
NE1:EGS8 -1 VC4-xv:VC4-1
C4
4:V VCTRUNK2 PORT2
VC User H2
VLAN 100 VCTRUNK1 VC4-xv:VC4-2
PORT1 2
VC4-xv:VC4-1 4-
User G1 VC
VCTRUNK2 4:
VC
VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC
VLAN 200 VCTRUNK3 4:
VC NE4:EGT6
PORT2 4-
VC4-xv:VC4-3 1
User H1
VCTRUNK4 VC PORT1
4:V VCTRUNK1
C 4-2 User G3
VC4-xv:VC4-4 VC4-xv:VC4-1
VB1 VCTRUNK2 PORT2
User H3
VC4-xv:VC4-2

SDH

PORT VCTRUNK

Strip VLAN Label Add VLAN Label Strip VLAN Label

Data(User G) VLAN(100) Data(User G) Data(User G)

Data(User H) VLAN(200) Data(User H) Data(User H)

l The Ethernet LAN services of user G:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and the
first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.
– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGS8 board of
NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE2.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-109

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

– Are added and dropped by using the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGS8 board
of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) on the EGT6 board of NE4.
l The Ethernet LAN services of user H:
– Occupy the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE2 and
the second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) on the SDH link between NE1 and NE4.
– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) on the EGS8 board
of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the fourth VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGS8 board
of NE1 and the second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

Table 4-29 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Paramete NE1 NE2 NE4

r

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Working 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M 1000M

Mode Full- Full- Full- Full- Full- Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame
Length

TAG Access Access - - - -

Entry Enabled Enabled - - - -

Detection

Default 100 200 - - - -

VLAN ID

VLAN 0 0 - - - -
Priority

Port Type UNI UNI - - - -

Table 4-30 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Param NE1 NE2 NE3

eter

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR VCTR

UNK1 UNK2 UNK3 UNK4 UNK1 UNK2 UNK1 UNK2

4-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Param NE1 NE2 NE3

eter

Mappin GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP

g
Protoco
l

TAG Access Access Access Access - - - -

Entry Enable Enable Enable Enable - - - -

Detecti d d d d
on

Default 100 100 200 200 - - - -

VLAN
ID

VLAN 0 0 0 0 - - - -
Priority

Bound VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4- VC4-

Path xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4 xv:VC4
-1 -2 -3 -4 -1 -2 -1 -2

Port UNI UNI UNI UNI - - - -

Type

Table 4-31 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1q bridge)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGS8

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type IEEE 802.1q

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Bridge Learning Mode IVL

Ingress Filter Enabled

VB Mount Port PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3,

VCTRUNK4

VLAN VLAN VLAN filtering table 1 VLAN filtering table 2

Filtering Filtering

VLAN ID 100 200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, PORT2, VCTRUNK3,

Physical Port VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK4

Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-111

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

PORT2 Hub

VCTRUNK Spoke
1

VCTRUNK Spoke
2

VCTRUNK Hub
3

VCTRUNK Hub
4

4.10.3 Configuration Process

At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1q bridge)
and a VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure transparent
transmission EPL services only.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.

You must be familiar with 4.3.4 Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services.

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.

l The Ethernet switching boards that support EVPLAN services are provided in 9.1 Service
Support Capability of Ethernet Boards.

l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN services for user G1, user G2, user G3, user H1, user H2, and user H3
on NE1.
1. Configure the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGS8 board) used
by the services of user G1 and user H1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

4-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 carries the services

/ PORT2: Enabled and Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
Disable PORT1 and PORT2.
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the Ethernet service access
g Mode Duplex equipment of user G1 and user H1 supports
PORT2: 1000M Full- the 1000M full-duplex mode. Hence,
Duplex Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

TAG PORT1: Access The access equipment of user G1 and user H1

PORT2: Access does not support VLAN tags. Hence, the
Ethernet access equipment transmits only the
packets without the VLAN tags. In this
example, TAG are set to Access for PORT1
and PORT2.

Default PORT1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN PORT2: 200 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID Ethernet services between user G1, user G2,
and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on
the transmission network side for the
EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,
and user H3. In this manner, the services of
different users are isolated.

VLAN - This parameter adopts the default value.

Priority

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-113

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Entry PORT1: Enabled The packets of user G1 and user H1 do not

Detectio PORT2: Enabled carry VLAN tags. Hence, the entry detection
n function must be enabled to check whether
the packets carry VLAN tags. In this
example, Entry Detection is set to
Enabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port PORT1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type PORT2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and
VCTRUNK4 of the EGS8 board) used by the services of user G2, user G3, user H2, and
user H3 on NE1.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

TAG VCTRUNK1: Access The service access equipment of user G2,

VCTRUNK2: Access user G3, user H2, and user H3 supports
VLAN tags and the transmitted data frames
VCTRUNK3: Access do not carry VLAN tags. In this example,
VCTRUNK4: Access TAG is set to Access for VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK4.

4-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Default VCTRUNK1: 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to

VLAN VCTRUNK2: 100 100 on the transmission network side for the
ID EVPLAN services between user G1, user G2,
VCTRUNK3: 200 and user G3. The VLAN ID is set to 200 on
VCTRUNK4: 200 the transmission network side for the
EVPLAN services between user H1, user H2,
and user H3. In this manner, the services of
different users are isolated.

VLAN VCTRUNK1: 0 This parameter adopts the default value.

Priority VCTRUNK2: 0
VCTRUNK3: 0
VCTRUNK4: 0

Entry VCTRUNK1: Enabled If the packets of user G2, user G3, user H2,
Detectio VCTRUNK2: Enabled and user H3 do not carry VLAN tags, the
n entry detection function must be enabled to
VCTRUNK3: Enabled check whether the packets carry VLAN tags.
VCTRUNK4: Enabled In this example, Entry Detection is set to
Enabled.

l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: UNI UNI indicates the user-network interface,

Type VCTRUNK2: UNI namely, the interface of the service provider
located near the user side. The UNI interface
VCTRUNK3: UNI processes the tag attribute of IEEE 802.1q-
VCTRUNK4: UNI compliant packets. That is, the UNI interface
processes and identifies the VLAN
information of the accessed user packets,
according to the supported tag flags, namely
Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.

l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-115

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP In this example, the EGS8 board is used. This
g VCTRUNK2: GFP parameter adopts the default value GFP.
Protocol Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on
VCTRUNK3: GFP the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
VCTRUNK4: GFP equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.
VCTRUNK3:
Scrambling mode[X43
+1]
VCTRUNK4:
Scrambling mode[X43
+1]

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
VCTRUNK3: FCS32 the interconnected equipment at both ends
VCTRUNK4: FCS32 must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc VCTRUNK3: Big endian the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e VCTRUNK4: Big endian the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header VCTRUNK3: No value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
VCTRUNK4: No interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

4-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS VCTRUNK2: Enabled enabled.
VCTRUNK3: Enabled
VCTRUNK4: Enabled

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
VCTRUNK2: Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.
VCTRUNK3: Huawei
Mode
VCTRUNK4: Huawei
Mode

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time VCTRUNK2: 2000 default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
VCTRUNK3: 2000 user.
VCTRUNK4: 2000

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) VCTRUNK2: 300 default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.
VCTRUNK3: 300
VCTRUNK4: 300

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.
VCTRUNK3: Disabled
VCTRUNK4: Disabled

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the following
parameters in the Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click
and then click Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-33, VCTRUNK1 of the

G2 e Ports K1 EGS8 board is used by the service of user G2.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-117

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user G2 uses a 100 Mbit/s

lable el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Bou bound.
nd For the method of calculating the bound
Path timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
s 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirection The service of user G2 is a bidirectional

vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-1 For the resources used by other boards, see 9.2
ilabl Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
ourc
es

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-33, VCTRUNK2 of the

G3 e Ports K2 EGS8 board is used by the service of user G3.

Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user G3 uses a 100 Mbit/s

lable el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Bou bound.
nd For the method of calculating the bound
Path timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
s 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirection The service of user G3 is a bidirectional

vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-2 For the resources used by other boards, see 9.2
ilabl Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
ourc
es

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-33, VCTRUNK3 of the

H2 e Ports K3 EGS8 board is used by the service of user H2.

4-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user H2 uses a 100 Mbit/s

lable el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Bou bound.
nd For the method of calculating the bound
Path timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
s 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirection The service of user H2 is a bidirectional

vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-3 For the resources used by other boards, see 9.2
ilabl Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
ourc
es

User Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-33, VCTRUNK4 of the

H3 e Ports K4 EGS8 board is used by the service of user H3.

Avai Lev VC4-xv The service of user H3 uses a 100 Mbit/s

lable el bandwidth. Hence, one VC-4 needs to be
Bou bound.
nd For the method of calculating the bound
Path timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
s 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Ser Bidirection The service of user H3 is a bidirectional

vice al service.
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-4 For the resources used by other boards, see 9.2
ilabl Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
ourc
es

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Create a bridge for the EGS8 board on NE1.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-119

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
l Click New.
l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describe

the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

VB Type 802.1q The IEEE 802.1q bridge supports isolation by using

one layer of VLAN tags. This bridge checks the
contents of the VLAN tags that are in the data frames
and performs Layer 2 switching according to the
destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs.

Bridge IVL/Ingress When Bridge Learning Mode is set to IVL, the

Switch Mode Filter Enable bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags that are
in the packets and performs Layer 2 switching
according to the destination MAC addresses and the
VLAN IDs of the packets.

Bridge IVL -
Learning
Mode

Ingress Filter Enabled -

MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

l Click Configure Mount.

l In Available Mounted Ports, select PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Then, click .
l Click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful. ClickClose.
l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
4. Create a VLAN filtering table.
l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
l Click New.
l Create the VLAN filtering table for user G1, user G2, and user G3 in the Create
VLAN dialog box that is displayed.

4-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 100 on

the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user G1, user G2, and user G3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then, click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. ClickClose.
l Create the VLAN filtering table for user H1, user H2, and user H3.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the VLAN ID is set to 200 on

the transmission network side for the EVPLAN
services between user H1, user H2, and user H3.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT2, VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4. Click

. Then, click OK. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.
5. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge. After setting
the parameters, click Apply. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed, indicating
that the operation is successful. ClickClose.

Parameter Value in This Description

Example

Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub If user G2 need not communicate with user G3,
VCTRUNK1: set VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 that access
Spoke the services of user G2 and user G3 to Spoke.
Ports of the Spoke attribute cannot
VCTRUNK2: communicate with each other. A port of the
Spoke Hub attribute can communicate with a port of
PORT2: Hub the Spoke or Hub attribute.
VCTRUNK3:
Hub
VCTRUNK4:
Hub

6. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user G2,
user G3, user H2, and user H3.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-121

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog
box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
User Paramete Value in Description
r This
Example

User G2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
G2 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user G2 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-1.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User G3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
G3 is at the VC-4 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user G3 is a bidirectional

l service.

4-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 2 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK2. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-2.

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the
same as the number of sink timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User H2 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
H2 is at the VC-12 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user H2 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 3 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK3. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-3.

Sink Slot 171-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-123

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Sink 2 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the
same as the number of source timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User H3 Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
H3 is at the VC-12 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user H3 is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 4 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK4. In this example, the
value of Available Resources is VC4-4.

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 2 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the
same as the number of source timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.

NOTE
The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See 4.4
Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board to set the parameters.

4-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Step 3 Check whether the services are configured correctly. For the operation procedures, see 8.15
Testing Ethernet Service Channels.
Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

4.11 Configuring EVPLAN Services (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge)

The QinQ technology provides an economical and easy solution for Layer 2 virtual private
networks (VPNs). The IEEE 802.1ad bridge uses the QinQ technology to provide the VPN
solution, thus facilitating the identifying, differentiating, and grooming of EVPLAN services.
4.11.1 Networking Diagram
A network operator requires that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI) services
sent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.
4.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4
respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards.
The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN IDs are tagged with different S-VLAN
IDs. The service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.
4.11.3 Configuration Process
At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
and an S-VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure
transparent transmission EPL services only.

4.11.1 Networking Diagram

A network operator requires that the voice over IP (VoIP) and high speed Internet (HSI) services
sent to the transmission network be uniformly labeled and groomed at the convergence node.

Service Requirement
As shown in Figure 4-34, the transmission network is required to transmit the VoIP and HSI
services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-125

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

The service requirements are as follows:

l The VoIP services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2
and NE4 respectively and into the VoIP server at the convergence node NE1. The services
share a 100 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The HSI services of user M and user N are accessed into the transmission network at NE2
and NE4 respectively and into the HSI server at the convergence node NE1. The services
share a 150 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The VoIP services need to be isolated from the HSI services.
l The data communication equipment of user M and user N provides 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet
optical interfaces that work in 1000M full-duplex mode and support VLAN tags.
– C-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 10
– C-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 20
NOTE

The application scenarios where one branch needs to communicate with other branches are as follows:
l User M needs to communicate with user N.
l User M need not communicate with user N.
If user M and user N need to communicate with each other, skip Step 1.5.

The operator requires that all services received from the user side should be uniformly labeled
and groomed through planned S-VLANs.

l S-VLAN ID of the VoIP services: 100

l S-VLAN ID of the HSI services: 200

Figure 4-34 Networking diagram for configuring EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

NE3
T2000

Line Board 1-JL64 Line Board 17-JL64

Ethernet Board 15-EGT6 Ethernet Board 15-EGT6

User M PORT1 PORT1

NE2 NE4 User N
Service C-VLAN 1 NE1 17 Service C-VLAN
VoIP 10 VoIP 10
VoIP 17 1
HSI 20 HSI HSI 20

PORT1 PORT2
Line Board 1-JL64
VCTRUNK Line Board 17-JL64
Ethernet Board 4-EGS8

VB1 S-VLAN 100 VB1 S-VLAN 200

VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
PORT1 PORT2

4-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Board Configuration Information

For the EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) services supported by Ethernet switching boards, refer
to Table 9-1.
In this example, the convergence node NE1 is configured with an EGS8 board that supports the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge, thus implementing the EVPLAN services in which VoIP data is isolated
from HSI data.
l The VoIP services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 10 from NE2 and NE4 are further tagged
with the S-VLAN ID of 100 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then,
the services are forwarded to the VoIP server through Layer 2 switching.
l The HSI services tagged with the C-VLAN ID of 20 from NE2 and NE4 are further tagged
with the S-VLAN ID of 200 when they arrive at the IEEE 802.1ad bridge of NE1. Then,
the services are forwarded to the HSI server through Layer 2 switching.
The access nodes NE2 and NE4 are configured with a EGT6 board each. The EPL services are
configured to be transparently transmitted from NE2 and NE4 to NE1.
NOTE
As described in Table 9-1, the Ethernet boards are classified into the Ethernet transparent transmission
boards and Ethernet switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services whereas the Ethernet switching boards support EPL
services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching. Hence, Ethernet switching boards are used more widely
than Ethernet transparent transmission boards.

4.11.2 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The services of user M and user N are transmitted from the access nodes NE2 and NE4
respectively to the convergence node NE1 through the Ethernet transparent transmission boards.
The VoIP and HSI services carrying different C-VLAN IDs are tagged with different S-VLAN
IDs. The service data is isolated and exchanged at Layer 2 through S-VLAN filtering.
Figure 4-35 shows the signal flow of the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge) and the
timeslot allocation to the EVPLAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).
For the method of calculating the bandwidth of the Ethernet services transmitted on a
VCTRUNK, see 9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet
Boards.

Figure 4-35 Signal flow of and timeslot allocation

NE1:EGS8 NE2:EGT6

-1 VCTRUNK1 PORT1
SVLAN 100 :VC4 User M
VC4 C4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-1
:V
PORT1 V C4 VC4-xv:VC4-2
VoIP VCTRUNK1
Server VC4-xv:VC4-1
VC4-xv:VC4-2
SVLAN 200 V C4
:V NE4:EGT6
VCTRUNK2 VC4 C4-1
PORT2 :VC4
HSI VC4-xv:VC4-3 -2
Server VC4-xv:VC4-4 PORT1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-xv:VC4-1
User N
VC4-xv:VC4-2
VB1 SDH

PORT VCTRUNK

Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP) S-VLAN(100) C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP) C-VLAN(10) Data(VoIP)

C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI) S-VLAN(200) C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI) C-VLAN(20) Data(HSI)

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-127

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

l The EVPLAN services of user M:

– Occupy the first VC-4 (VC4:VC4-1) and second VC-4 (VC4:VC4-2) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE2.
– Are added and dropped by using the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and second VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGS8 board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and
second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE2.
l The EVPLAN services of user N:
– Occupy the third VC-4 (VC4:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4 (VC4:VC4-4) on the SDH link
between NE1 and NE4.
– Are added and dropped by using the third VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-3) and fourth VC-4
(VC4-xv:VC4-4) on the EGS8 board of NE1 and the first VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-1) and
second VC-4 (VC4-xv:VC4-2) on the EGT6 board of NE4.

Table 4-32 Parameters of the external ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE4

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT1

Enabled/ Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Disabled

Working Mode 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full- 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex

Maximum 1522 1522 1522 1522

Frame Length

Port Type C-Aware C-Aware - -

Table 4-33 Parameters of the internal ports of the Ethernet boards

Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3

Board EGS8 EGT6 EGT6

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1

Mapping GFP GFP GFP GFP

Protocol

Port Type C-Aware C-Aware - -

Bound Path VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-3, VC4-xv:VC4-1, VC4-xv:VC4-1,

VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-4 VC4-xv:VC4-2 VC4-xv:VC4-2

4-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Table 4-34 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)

Parameter Ethernet LAN Service of NE1

Board EGS8

VB Name VB1

Bridge Type 802.1ad

Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable

Bridge Learning Mode IVL

Ingress Filter Enabled

Operation Type Add S-VLAN base for Port and C-VLAN

VB Port 1 2 3 4

Mount Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

VLAN VLAN VLAN filtering table 1 VLAN filtering table 2

Filterin Filtering
g
VLAN ID 100 200

Forwarding PORT1, VCTRUNK1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1,

Physical Port VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2

Hub/ PORT1 Hub

Spoke
PORT2 Hub

VCTRUNK Spoke
1

VCTRUNK Spoke
2

4.11.3 Configuration Process

At the convergence node NE1, you need to create an EVPLAN service (IEEE 802.1ad bridge)
and an S-VLAN filtering table. At the access nodes NE2 and NE4, you need to configure
transparent transmission EPL services only.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 4.3.4 Flow of Configuring EVPLAN Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-129

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Background Information
If the Ethernet boards used in the actual application scenarios are different from the boards in
this example, you need to know the requirements for configuring specific boards.
l The Ethernet switching boards that support EVPLAN services are provided in 9.1 Service
Support Capability of Ethernet Boards.
l For the VCTRUNK binding requirements of Ethernet switching boards, see 9.2
Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports ports with the C-Aware and S-Aware attributes only.
The C-Aware ports are used to add and strip the S-VLAN tags. The S-Aware ports are used to
transparently transmit the S-VLAN tags.
The IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge supports the following operation types:
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN
l Performing port mounting based on the port
l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN
This topic describes the four operation types when Bridge Switch Mode of the IEEE 802.1ad
provider bridge is set to IVL/Ingress Filter Enabled.
l Adding the S-VLAN based on the port: The packets that enter the C-Aware port are added
with the preset S-VLAN tags, and are forwarded in the bridge according to the S-VLAN
filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.
l Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN: The entry detection is performed
for the packets that enter the C-Aware port. Then, the corresponding S-VLAN tags are
added to the packets according to the mapping relation between the C-VLAN tags and the
S-VLAN tags of the packets. If the mapping relation does not exist, the packets are
discarded. After the S-VLAN tags are added, the packets enter the bridge, where the packets
are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering table. Before the packets leave the C-
Aware port, the S-VLAN tags are stripped.
NOTE

l A C-Aware port supports different C-VLAN tags being mapped into different S-VLAN tags, but
does not support the same C-VLAN tag being mapping into multiple S-VLAN tags.
l Performing port mounting based on the port: The packets that enter the S-Aware port are
not filtered. Instead, the S-VLAN switch is performed directly. The packets must have the
S-VLAN tags. Otherwise, the packets are discarded. When the packets leave the S-Aware
port, the packets are transparently transmitted.
l Performing port mounting based on the port and the S-VLAN: The entry filtering is
performed according to the preset S-VLAN tag. The packets that do not belong to the S-
VLAN are discarded. Then, the packets are forwarded according to the S-VLAN filtering
table. When the packets leave the S-Aware port, the packets are transparently transmitted.
In the case of the four operation types, the following conditions must be met before the packets
leave a port:
l The port must be contained in the S-VLAN filtering table that is created by the user.
l The S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port must be specified when the user manually
mounts the port to the bridge.

4-130 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

– In the case of a C-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN
ID that is added when the packets enter the port.
– In the case of an S-Aware port, the S-VLAN ID corresponding to the port is the S-VLAN
ID that is set when the user mounts the port to the bridge. If the S-Aware port is mounted
based on the port, the S-VLAN ID is considered to contain all the legal S-VLAN IDs.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the EVPLAN service of NE1.
1. Set the attributes of the external ports (PORT1 and PORT2 of the EGS8 board) used by the
VoIP server and HSI server.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select External Port.
l Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enabled PORT1: Enabled In this example, PORT1 and PORT2 transmit

/ PORT2: Enabled the services and Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disable Enabled for PORT1 and PORT2.
d

Workin PORT1: 1000M Full- In this example, the VoIP server and HSI
g Mode Duplex server support the 1000M full-duplex mode.
PORT2: 1000M Full- Hence, Working Mode is set to 1000M Full-
Duplex Duplex for PORT1 and PORT2.

Maximu PORT1: 1522 Generally, this parameter adopts the default

m PORT2: 1522 value 1522.
Frame
Length

MAC PORT1: Non-Loopback The MAC loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, MAC
ck Loopback is set to Non-Loopback.

PHY PORT1: Non-Loopback The PHY loopback setting is used for fault
Loopba PORT2: Non-Loopback diagnosis. In this example, PHY Loopback
ck is set to Non-Loopback.

l Click the Flow Control tab. The parameters in the Flow Control tab page adopt the
default values.
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-131

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in This Example Description

Port Type PORT1: C-Aware The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute

PORT2: C-Aware must be selected for the port when
you configure the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge. The C-Aware port connects to
the port on the client network,
identifies and processes the packets
that contain C-VLAN tags (namely,
client tags). The S-Aware port
connects to the port on the network
side, identifies and processes the
packets that contain S-VLAN tags
(namely, service tags of the network
operator).

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG
Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page
need not be set.
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
2. Set the attributes of the internal ports (VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 of the EGS8 board)
used by the services of user M and user N on NE1.
l Select Internal Port.
l Click the Network Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then, the
Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Port VCTRUNK1: C-Aware The C-Aware or S-Aware attribute must be

Type VCTRUNK2: C-Aware selected for the port when you configure the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge. The C-Aware port is
connected to the network port of the user
equipment, and identifies and processes the
packets that carry the C-VLAN tags. The S-
aware port is used for connecting to the
supplier network, and identifies and
processes the packets that carry the S-VLAN
tags.

l When Port Type is set to C-Aware or S-Aware, the parameters in the TAG
Attributes tab page are invalid. Hence, The parameters in the TAG Attributes tab page
need not be set.
l Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Then,
the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

4-132 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

Mappin VCTRUNK1: GFP In this example, the EGS8 board is used. This
g VCTRUNK2: GFP parameter adopts the default value GFP.
Protocol Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on
the Ethernet boards of the interconnected
equipment at both ends must be set to the
same value.

Scrambl VCTRUNK1: In this example, this parameter adopts the

e Scrambling mode[X43 default value Scrambling mode[X43+1].
+1] Scramble of the VCTRUNKs on the
VCTRUNK2: Ethernet boards of the interconnected
Scrambling mode[X43 equipment at both ends must be set to the
+1] same value.

Check VCTRUNK1: FCS32 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Field VCTRUNK2: FCS32 default value FCS32. Check Field Length
Length of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

FCS VCTRUNK1: Big endian When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, FCS
Calculat VCTRUNK2: Big endian Calculated Bit Sequence is set to Big
ed Bit endian. FCS Calculated Bit Sequence of
Sequenc the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of
e the interconnected equipment at both ends
must be set to the same value.

Extensi VCTRUNK1: No When Mapping Protocol is set to GFP, this

on VCTRUNK2: No parameter is valid and adopts the default
Header value No. Extension Header Option of the
Option VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards of the
interconnected equipment at both ends must
be set to the same value.

l This operation is optional. Click the LCAS tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply. Then, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Parame Value in This Example Description
ter

Enablin VCTRUNK1: Enabled In this example, the LCAS function is

g LCAS VCTRUNK2: Enabled enabled.

LCAS VCTRUNK1: Huawei In this example, this parameter adopts the

Mode Mode default value Huawei Mode. When Huawei
VCTRUNK2: Huawei equipment is used at both ends, LCAS
Mode Mode of the equipment at both ends is set to
Huawei Mode.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-133

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parame Value in This Example Description

ter

HO VCTRUNK1: 2000 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time VCTRUNK2: 2000 default value 2000. This parameter can also
(ms) be set according to the requirement of the
user.

WTR VCTRUNK1: 300 In this example, this parameter adopts the

Time(s) VCTRUNK2: 300 default value 300. This parameter can also be
set according to the requirement of the user.

TSD VCTRUNK1: Disabled In this example, the TSD function is disabled.

VCTRUNK2: Disabled The LCAS does not check the B3 bit error or
BIP status of the VCTRUNK members.

l Click the Bound Path tab. Click the Configuration button. Set the parameters in the
Bound Path Configuration dialog box that is displayed. Click and then click
Apply. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Click Close in the Operation
Result that is displayed.
User Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

User M Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-35, VCTRUNK1 of the

e Ports K1 EGS8 board is used by the service of user M.

Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user M uses a 200 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be
Boun bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Serv Bidirectio The service of user M is a bidirectional

ice nal service.
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-1, For the resources used by other boards, see

ilabl VC4-2 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
ourc
es

User N Configurabl VCTRUN As shown in Figure 4-35, VCTRUNK2 of the

e Ports K2 EGS8 board is used by the service of user N.

4-134 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Avail Lev VC4-xv The service of user N uses a 200 Mbit/s

able el bandwidth. Hence, two VC-4s need to be
Boun bound.
d For the method of calculating the bound
Paths timeslots based on the service bandwidth, see
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.

Serv Bidirectio The service of user N is a bidirectional

ice nal service.
Dire
ctio
n

Ava VC4-3, For the resources used by other boards, see

ilabl VC4-4 9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with
e VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards.
Res
ourc
es

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The parameters in the Advanced Attributes tab
page adopt the default values.
3. Create a bridge for the EGS8 board on NE1.
l In the NE Explorer, select the EGS8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
l Click New.
l Set the parameters in the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VB Name VB1 This parameter is a character string used to describe

the bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains the
information about the detailed application of the
bridge.

VB Type 802.1ad The IEEE 802.1ad bridge supports data frames with
two layers of VLAN tags. This bridge adopts the
outer S-VLAN tags to isolate different VLANs and
supports only the mounted ports whose attributes are
C-Aware or S-Aware.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-135

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Bridge IVL/Ingress This bridge checks the contents of the VLAN tags
Switch Mode Filter Enable that are in the packets and performs Layer 2
switching according to the destination MAC
addresses and the S-VLAN IDs of the packets.

Bridge IVL -
Learning
Mode

Ingress Filter Enabled -

MAC Enabled -
Address Self-
learning

l Click Configure Mount.

l Set the parameters in the Service Mount Configuration dialog box that is displayed.
Click Add Mount Port and then click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog
box.
Parameter Value in This Example

Operation Adding the S-VLAN tag based on the port and C-VLAN
Type

VB Port 1 2 3 4

Mount Port PORT1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2

C-VLAN 10 20 10 20 10 20

S-VLAN 100 200 100 200 100 200

The other parameters take the default values.

l Click OK.
l In the Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box that is displayed, click OK. Click
Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
4. Create a VLAN filtering table.
l Select the created bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
l Click New.
l Create the VLAN filtering table of the VoIP service.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VLAN ID 100 According to the plan, the VoIP service uses the S-
VLAN ID of 100.

4-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then, click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result that is displayed.
l Create the VLAN filtering table of the HSI service.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

VLAN ID 200 According to the plan, the HSI service uses the S-
VLAN ID of 200.

l In Available Forwarding Ports, select PORT2, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2. Click

. Then, click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is
displayed.
5. Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
NOTE

If normal communication is required between user M and user N, proceed to Step 1.6.
l Select the created bridge and click the Service Mount tab.
l Change the Hub/Spoke attribute of the port that is mounted to the bridge.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

Hub/Spoke PORT1: Hub User M and user N need not communicate with
PORT2: Hub each other. In this case, set VCTRUNK1 and
VCTRUNK2 that access the services of user M
VCTRUNK1: and user N to the Spoke attribute. Ports of the
Spoke Spoke attribute cannot communicate with each
VCTRUNK2: other. A port of the Hub attribute can
Spoke communicate with a port of the Spoke or Hub
attribute.

6. Configure the cross-connections from the Ethernet services to the SDH links for user M
and user N.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree. Click .
l Click Create on the lower-right pane to display the Create SDH Service dialog box.
Set the parameters that are required. Click Apply. Then, click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-137

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
4 Configuring Ethernet Services Configuration Guide

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

User M Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
M is at the VC-12 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user M is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

Source 1-2 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK1. In this example, the
values of Available Resources are VC4-1
and VC4-2.

Sink Slot 17-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1-2 The value range of the sink timeslots can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslots. The number
1,3-6) of sink timeslots, however, must be
consistent with the number of source
timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

User N Level VC4 The timeslot bound with the service of user
N is at the VC-12 level. The service level
must be consistent with the level of the
paths bound with the VCTRUNK.

Direction Bidirectiona The service of user N is a bidirectional

l service.

Source Slot 4-EGS8-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the Ethernet board as the source slot.

4-138 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring Ethernet Services

User Paramete Value in Description

r This
Example

Source 3-4 The value range of the source timeslots is

Timeslot consistent with the value of Available
Range(e.g. Resources, which is set for the paths bound
1,3-6) with VCTRUNK2. In this example, the
values of Available Resources are VC4-3
and VC4-4.

Sink Slot 1-JL64-1 When you create a bidirectional SDH

(SDH-1) service from an Ethernet board to a line
board, it is recommended that you set the
slot of the line board as the sink slot.

Sink 1-2 The value range of the sink timeslot can be

Timeslot the same as or different from the value
Range(e.g. range of the source timeslot. The number of
1,3-6) source timeslots, however, must be the
same as the number of source timeslots.

Activate Yes -
Immediatel
y

Step 2 Configure the EPL services of NE2 and NE4.

NOTE
The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE4 are point-to-point transparent transmission EPL services. See 4.4
Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Transparent Transmission Board to set the parameters.

Step 3 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.

Step 4 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Relevant Task
If the services are configured incorrectly and thus need to be deleted, see 7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet
Private Line Services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-139

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

About This Chapter

When the OptiX OSN 9500 is connected to the data terminal equipment through the broadcast
data port and is configured with broadcast data services, the broadcast data communication can
be realized.

5.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment uses the RS232 or RS422 broadcast data port to realize the full-duplex
communication of the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART).
5.2 Networking Diagram
NE1 is configured with the monitoring host. NE2, NE3, and NE4 are configured with the
environment monitors. Communication between the monitoring host and the environment
monitors is required.
5.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
Before you configure the broadcast data services, you need to be familiar with the signal flow
of a broadcast data service according to the networking diagram.
5.4 Configuration Process
To meet the requirements for the broadcast data services between the monitoring host and the
environment monitors, you need to configure the broadcast data services of NE1 to NE4.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services Configuration Guide

5.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment uses the RS232 or RS422 broadcast data port to realize the full-duplex
communication of the universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART).

Overview
The data is transparently transmitted through the broadcast data port. Hence, you need not
configure the port rate and transmission control protocol. The maximum transmission rate is
19.2 kbit/s. The broadcast data port is connected to the data terminal equipment. Hence, you can
configure the point-to-point and point-to-multipoint communication modes. The data can be
broadcast to multiple optical interfaces.
As shown in Figure 5-1, the overheads SERIAL1-SERIAL4 can be used as the broadcast data
channels. The broadcast data port uses the RJ-45 connector. For the pin assignment of the
broadcast data port, refer to Table 5-1.

NOTE

The broadcast data port accesses the asynchronous data and then transmits the data to the opposite end over
byte SERIAL1, SERIAL2, SERIAL3, or SERIAL4. The opposite end receives the digital signal and
converts the digital signal into an asynchronous serial signal.

Figure 5-1 Overhead channel

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial1 Serial2

AU_PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 Serial4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12 Serial3

S1 M1 E2

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Table 5-1 Pin assignment of the broadcast data port

RJ-45 Connector Pin Signal Description

Numbe
r

1 422TXD+ RS422 TX+

2 422TXD- RS422 TX-

3 422RXD+ RS422 RX+

8 4 232RXD RS232 RX
Pin
Pi n1
5 GND Grounding

6 422RXD- RS422 RX-

7 N.C Not defined

8 232TXD RS232 TX

Requirements of the Environment Monitor

The environment monitor has the following requirements for the power level and transmission
rate of the port:

l The port must be of the RS232 level, where logic 1 ranges from -5 V to -15 V and logic 0
ranges from +5 V to +15 V.
l When the data is not transmitted, the port must be of the RS232 high level (approximately
-9 V). Only one slave station can transmit data to the master station at a time.
l The maximum rate must not exceed 19.2 kbit/s.

Precautions for Configuring the Broadcast Data Port

When you configure the broadcast data port, note the following points (including the
configuration of the optical interfaces and the direction of the signal flow):

l The optical interfaces that are not required must not be configured in the broadcast domain
of the broadcast data port.
l The NEs where the broadcast ports are not used must not be configured in the broadcast
domain.
l It is recommended that the signal flow is in the same direction as the NE clock tracing
direction.

5.2 Networking Diagram

NE1 is configured with the monitoring host. NE2, NE3, and NE4 are configured with the
environment monitors. Communication between the monitoring host and the environment
monitors is required.

In the network shown in Figure 5-2, the service requirements are as follows:

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services Configuration Guide

l NE1 is configured with the monitoring host. NE2, NE3, and NE4 are configured with the
environment monitors.
l The monitoring host functions as the master station, controls the data reporting from NE2,
NE3, and NE4, and broadcasts commands to the environment monitors of NE2, NE3, and
NE4.
l The environment monitors of NE2, NE3, and NE4 function as the slave stations, collect
data, and report the data to the monitoring host.

Figure 5-2 Networking diagram of the broadcast data port

Master station

1-JL64 17-JL64

Slave station NE1 Slave station

17-JL64 1-JL64

STM-16 two-fiber
NE2 NE4
bidirectional MSP ring

1-JL64 NE3
OptiX NE

17-JL64 Data flow

Slave station

Master station

Slave station

5.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

Before you configure the broadcast data services, you need to be familiar with the signal flow
of a broadcast data service according to the networking diagram.

l During the communication between the master station and the slave station, the signal flow
is as follows:
– The data of the monitoring host is added to the SDH line board of NE1 through the
broadcast data port of NE1 and is then transmitted towards the four directions of NE2
and NE4.
– On the NE2 side, the data that is transmitted from the NE1 side is dropped to the
broadcast data port of NE2 through the SDH line board of NE2, and is then transmitted
to the environment monitor of NE2. That is, the data of the monitoring host is transmitted

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

to the environment monitor on the NE2 side. At the same time, the data of the monitoring
host passes through the SDH line board and is then transmitted to the direction of NE3.
– On the NE3 side, the data that passes through the NE2 side is dropped to the broadcast
data port of NE3 through the SDH line board of NE3, and is then transmitted to the
environment monitor of NE3. That is, the data of the monitoring host is transmitted to
the environment monitor on the NE3 side.
– On the NE4 side, the data that is transmitted from the NE1 side is dropped to the
broadcast data port of NE4 through the SDH line board of NE4 and is then transmitted
to the environment monitor of NE4. That is, the data of the monitoring host is transmitted
to the environment monitor on the NE4 side.
l The signal flow from each slave station to the master station is in the opposite direction to
the signal flow from the master station to each slave station.
You can determine the overhead bytes, source, and sink of the broadcast data of each NE
according to the service signal flow and Figure 5-2.

Table 5-2 NE parameters

NE Overhead Broadcast Data Source Broadcast Data Sink
Interface

NE1 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1-JL64, 17-JL64

NE2 SERIAL1 17-JL64 1-JL64, SERIAL1

NE3 SERIAL1 17-JL64 SERIAL1

NE4 SERIAL1 1-JL64 SERIAL1

NOTE

After the settings are performed for NE1 according to Table 5-2, NE1 broadcasts the data that is input
from the broadcast data source (broadcast data port) to the directions of the 1-JL64 and 17-JL64 at the same
time. The 1-JL64 and 17-JL64 transmit the input data to the broadcast data port. Hence, only one
environment monitor can transmit data to the monitoring host at a time.

5.4 Configuration Process

To meet the requirements for the broadcast data services between the monitoring host and the
environment monitors, you need to configure the broadcast data services of NE1 to NE4.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 5.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services Configuration Guide

Precautions

CAUTION
When you configure the broadcast data ports, ensure that the broadcast data ports do not form
a loop. Certain optical interfaces cannot be configured as the broadcast data ports.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the broadcast data service of NE1.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree.
l Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close
in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Overhead Byte Select the broadcast data channel that needs

to be set. Selects one from SERIAL1,
SERIAL2, SERIAL3, and SERIAL4, which
correspond to the SERIAL1, SERIAL2,
SERIAL3, and SERIAL4 bytes as shown in
Figure 5-1. In this example, Overhead
Byte is set to SERIAL1.

Working RS232 This parameter specifies the working mode

Mode of the selected broadcast data port.

Broadcast SERIAL1 The broad data source indicates the source

Data Source channel of the broadcast data.

Broadcast 1-JL64 and 17- The broadcast data sink indicates the sink
Data Sink JL64 channel of the broadcast data. In the
broadcast mode, one broadcast data source
can correspond to multiple broadcast data
sinks.

Step 2 Configure the broadcast data service of NE2.

l Click the quick NE switching icon and select NE2. Click OK.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE2 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree.
l Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close
in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 Select the broadcast data channel that needs
to be set. The setting must be the same as the
setting of NE1.

Working RS232 This parameter specifies the working mode

Mode of the selected broadcast data port.

Broadcast 17-JL64 The broad data source indicates the source

Data Source channel of the broadcast data.

Broadcast 1-JL64 and The broadcast data sink indicates the sink
Data Sink SERIAL1 channel of the broadcast data. In the
broadcast mode, one broadcast data source
can correspond to multiple broadcast data
sinks.

Step 3 Configure the broadcast data service of NE3.

l Click the quick NE switching icon and select NE3. Click OK.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree.
l Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close
in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in Description
This
Example

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 Select the broadcast data channel that needs
to be set. The setting must be the same as the
setting of NE1.

Working RS232 This parameter specifies the working mode

Mode of the selected broadcast data port.

Broadcast 17-JL64 The broad data source indicates the source

Data Source channel of the broadcast data.

Broadcast SERIAL1 The broad data sink indicates the sink

Data Sink channel of the broadcast data.

Step 4 Configure the broadcast data service of NE4.

l Click the quick NE switching icon and select NE4. Click OK.
l In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree.
l Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close
in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
5 Configuring Broadcast Data Services Configuration Guide

Parameter Value in Description

This
Example

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 Select the broadcast data channel that needs
to be set. The setting must be the same as the
setting of NE1.

Working RS232 This parameter specifies the working mode

Mode of the selected broadcast data port.

Broadcast 1-JL64 The broad data source indicates the source

Data Source channel of the broadcast data.

Broadcast SERIAL1 The broad data sink indicates the sink

Data Sink channel of the broadcast data.

Step 5 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 6 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the F1 Data Service

6 Configuring the F1 Data Service

About This Chapter

The F1 data service is transparently transmitted in the point-to-point mode by using the F1 byte.

6.1 Basic Concepts

The auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 9500 provides a 64 kbit/s synchronous data port
(namely, F1 port). The auxiliary interface board uses the F1 byte to provide the client with a
channel for transparently transmitting a point-to-point 64 kbit/s service.
6.2 Networking Diagram
The F1 data service is added to and dropped from NE1 and NE3 and passes through NE2.
6.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation
The F1 data service is accessed through the F1 data port of the auxiliary interface board. The F1
byte provides the client with a channel for transparently transmitting a 64 kbit/s service, thus
implementing end-to-end service transmission.
6.4 Configuration Process
This topic describes how to configure the F1 data service.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
6 Configuring the F1 Data Service Configuration Guide

6.1 Basic Concepts

The auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 9500 provides a 64 kbit/s synchronous data port
(namely, F1 port). The auxiliary interface board uses the F1 byte to provide the client with a
channel for transparently transmitting a point-to-point 64 kbit/s service.
The F1 data port is a codirectional port for transparently transmitting the 64 kbit/s point-to-point
service. Only point-to-point services can be configured on the F1 data port and the broadcast
data services cannot be configured on the F1 data port.
When the F1 data port is used, you need to configure the routes only, that is, you need to configure
the 64 kbit/s services to be added to, dropped from, or passed through the local station. After
the configuration is activated, the data transmission is performed.
The data is transparently transmitted. Hence, you need not configure the port rate and
transmission control protocol. The F1 data port adopts the RJ-45 connector. For the pin
assignment of the F1 data port, refer to Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Pin assignment of the F1 data port

RJ-45 Connector Pin Description
Number

1 TX+

2 TX-

3 RX+

8 4 Not defined
Pin
Pi n1
5 Not defined

6 RX-

7 Not defined

8 Not defined

6.2 Networking Diagram

The F1 data service is added to and dropped from NE1 and NE3 and passes through NE2.

Figure 6-1 shows the networking diagram for configuring the F1 data service.

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the F1 Data Service

Figure 6-1 Networking diagram of the F1 data service

T2000

NE4
Equipment for
accessing F1 data Equipment for
NE3 accessing F1 data
services NE1
1 services
Line board 1-JL64 17
Interface board 51-JEOW NE2 Line board
1 17-JL64
17 Interface board 51-JEOW

Line board 1-JL64

Line board 17-JL64

6.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation

The F1 data service is accessed through the F1 data port of the auxiliary interface board. The F1
byte provides the client with a channel for transparently transmitting a 64 kbit/s service, thus
implementing end-to-end service transmission.
The F1 service is added to or dropped from NE1 and NE3 and passes through NE2. Table 6-2
lists the data channels of each NE that need to be configured according to the service
requirements.

Table 6-2 NE parameters of the F1 data service

NE Data Channel 1 Data Channel 2

NE1 F1 17-JL64

NE2 1-JL64 17-JL64

NE3 F1 1-JL64

6.4 Configuration Process

This topic describes how to configure the F1 data service.

Prerequisite
The 2 Creating the Network task must be complete.
You must be familiar with 6.3 Signal Flow and Timeslot Allocation.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
6 Configuring the F1 Data Service Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the F1 data service of NE1.
1. Right-click the NE1 icon in the Main Topology, and choose NE Explorer.
2. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree.
3. Click the F1 Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply. Click Close in the
Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

Data Channel 1 F1 The F1 data service is added or dropped

through F1 of Data Channel 1.

Data Channel 2 17-JL64 The F1 data service is added or dropped

through 17-JL64 of Data Channel 2.

Step 2 Configure the F1 data service that passes through NE2.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the F1 data service of NE2.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

Data Channel 1 1-JL64 The F1 data service is added or dropped

through 1-JL64 of Data Channel 1.

Data Channel 2 17-JL64 The F1 data service is added or dropped

through 17-JL64 of Data Channel 2.

Step 3 Configure the F1 data service of NE3.

Refer to Step 1 and configure the F1 data service of NE3.
Parameter Value in This Description
Example

Data Channel 1 F1 The F1 data service is added or dropped

through F1 of Data Channel 1.

Data Channel 2 1-JL64 The F1 data service is added or dropped

through 1-JL64 of Data Channel 2.

Step 4 Enable the performance monitoring function of the NEs. For details, see 8.5 Setting
Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE.
Step 5 Back up the configuration data of the NEs. Three methods are available for the backup.

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 6 Configuring the F1 Data Service

Option Description
The SCC board is not configured with any 8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC
CF card. Board
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE
card. Database to a CF Card
The SCC board is configured with a CF 8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database
card. to a CF Card

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

7 Modifying the Configuration Data

About This Chapter

When you need to adjust the existing configuration data related to topologies and services, you
can modify the configuration data.

7.1 Modifying NE Attributes

You can modify the existing NE configuration data that needs adjustment.
7.2 Modifying the Board Configuration Data
You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment.
7.3 Modifying the Fiber Configuration Data
You can modify the existing fiber configuration data that needs adjustment.
7.4 Modifying the Service Configuration Data
You can modify the existing service configuration data that needs adjustment.
7.5 Modifying the Protection Subnet
This topic describes how to modify the configuration data of the existing protection subnet.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

7.1 Modifying NE Attributes

You can modify the existing NE configuration data that needs adjustment.

7.1.1 Modifying the NE ID

The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. The T2000 also uses the
NE ID to identify different NEs in the user interface and databases, and uses the NE ID as the
key word in searches. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a
network. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE, it results a collision in the ECC route. As a
result, it becomes difficult to manage some NEs. In the commissioning or expansion process,
when you need to adjust the original planning and modify the NE ID, you can use the T2000 to
achieve it.
7.1.2 Modifying the NE Name
You can modify the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.
7.1.3 Deleting NEs
If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the T2000. Deleting an NE removes
all information of the NE from the T2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.
7.1.4 Modifying GNE Parameters
During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or
modify the communication address.
7.1.5 Changing the GNE for NEs
When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does
not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between
the NEs and the T2000. Alternatively, if a GNE manages more than 50 NEs, change the GNE
for some NEs so that the communication between the T2000 and the NEs is not affected.

7.1.1 Modifying the NE ID

The ECC protocol uses the NE ID as the unique identifier of an NE. The T2000 also uses the
NE ID to identify different NEs in the user interface and databases, and uses the NE ID as the
key word in searches. Hence, you need to assign a unique NE ID to each NE when planning a
network. If an NE ID conflicts with another NE, it results a collision in the ECC route. As a
result, it becomes difficult to manage some NEs. In the commissioning or expansion process,
when you need to adjust the original planning and modify the NE ID, you can use the T2000 to
achieve it.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l The NE must be created.

Precautions

CAUTION
Modifying the NE ID may interrupt NE communication and reset the NE.

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click Modify NE ID, and the Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Enter the New ID and the New Extended ID. Click OK.
Step 4 Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

----End

7.1.2 Modifying the NE Name

You can modify the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 In the NE Attribute dialog box, enter a new NE name in Name. Click Apply. A prompt appears
telling you that the operation was successful.
NOTE

An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the following
special characters: | : * ? " < >.

Step 3 Click Close.

----End

7.1.3 Deleting NEs

If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the T2000. Deleting an NE removes
all information of the NE from the T2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions
If an NE is deleted, the links related to the NE are also deleted.

Procedure
l Delete a single SDH NE.
1. Right-click the NE on the Main Topology and choose Delete > Delete Device from
the shortcut menu. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
2. Click Yes. The Delete Device Results dialog box is displayed.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

3. Click Close, The NE icon is deleted from the Main Topology.

l Delete NEs in batches.
1. Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.
The Configuration Data Management window is displayed.

2. In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click . The Configuration Data
Management List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs.
3. Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed.
4. Click OK.
----End

7.1.4 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or
modify the communication address.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Precautions

CAUTION
This operation is risky, because it may interrupt the communication.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu. Click the GNE tab.
Step 2 Select the GNE to be modified, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set Gateway Type .
l When Gateway Type is set to IP Gateway, modify IP Address.

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

l When Gateway Type is set to OSI Gateway, modify NSAP Address.

NOTE

l Do not modify the Port No..

l Make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as the IP address of the
T2000. If they are not in the same network segment, set the corresponding network ports, to make sure
that the T2000 can log in to the GNE.

Step 4 Click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

----End

7.1.5 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the GNE that the non-gateway NE belongs to is changed and this non-gateway NE does
not belong to another GNE, you need to change the GNE to maintain the communication between
the NEs and the T2000. Alternatively, if a GNE manages more than 50 NEs, change the GNE
for some NEs so that the communication between the T2000 and the NEs is not affected.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click the NE tab.

Step 3 Select an NE. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE from the drop-down list.

Step 4 Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 5 Click Refresh.

----End

7.2 Modifying the Board Configuration Data

You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment.

7.2.1 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE dataAfter the NE data is configured, if physical boards are
added, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that
actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.
7.2.2 Deleting Boards
To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the NE Panel.
7.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters
You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment.

7.2.1 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE dataAfter the NE data is configured, if physical boards are
added, you need to add boards on the NE Panel. You can either add the physical boards that
actually operate on the NE or add the logical boards that do not exist on the actual equipment.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l The NE must be created.
l There must be idle slot on the NE Panel.

Background Information
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the subrack. The logical boards are created
on the T2000 and are saved on the SCC board, but they do not exist on the actual equipment.

Precautions
The NE panel is able to indicate the mapping relation between slots that house processing boards
and interface boards. When you click a processing board that is paired with an interface board
in the NE panel, the ID of the slot that houses the mapping interface board is displayed in orange.

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.

Step 2 Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the drop-down list.
NOTE
If the cross-connect board is installed in the subrack, add its corresponding logical board on the T2000.

----End

7.2.2 Deleting Boards

To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the NE Panel.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l The services and protection groups must be deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, double-click the NE icon to display the NE slot diagram.

Step 2 Right-click the board that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.

Step 3 Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box that is displayed.

----End

7.2.3 Modifying Board Configuration Parameters

You can modify the existing board configuration data that needs adjustment.

Prerequisite
To modify different configuration parameters of different boards, you may need to operate as
NM users with different authorities. You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or
higher. must be available at least.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose a proper item from the Function Tree.

Board Type Parameters

SDH board Multiplex section shared attribute, laser

enabling/disabling, optical interface
loopback

Ethernet board Port enabling, working mode, maximum

frame length, MAC loopback, PHY
loopback, TAG, entry test

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply.

----End

7.3 Modifying the Fiber Configuration Data

You can modify the existing fiber configuration data that needs adjustment.

7.3.1 Modifying Fiber Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and type of a fiber cable according to its
connection status and physical features.
7.3.2 Deleting Fibers
When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, you
need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
7.3.3 Deleting DCN Communication Cables
In certain scenarios such as network adjustment, you can delete an unwanted DCN
communication cable that is created previously.

7.3.1 Modifying Fiber Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and type of a fiber cable according to its
connection status and physical features.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu. The information of all fiber
cables is displayed in the pane on the right.

Step 2 In the Name column, right-click the value for a fiber cable and choose Modify Fiber/Cable
from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter a proper name
for the fiber cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 3 In the Length(km) column, right-click the value for a fiber cable and choose Modify Fiber/
Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter the actual
length for the fiber cable and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 4 Modify the attenuation of a fiber.

1. In the Attenuation column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/
Cable from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the actual loss and click OK. Click Close in
the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 5 Modify the type of the fiber.

1. In the Type column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from
the shortcut menu.

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

2. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, select the actual type of the fiber from
the drop-down list and click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

7.3.2 Deleting Fibers

When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, you
need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select the fiber you want to delete, right-click and choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut
menu. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the fiber cable.
Step 3 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

7.3.3 Deleting DCN Communication Cables

In certain scenarios such as network adjustment, you can delete an unwanted DCN
communication cable that is created previously.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 On the Main Topology, select a cable, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 In the Warning dialog box displayed, click OK.

----End

7.4 Modifying the Service Configuration Data

You can modify the existing service configuration data that needs adjustment.

7.4.1 Modifying SDH Services

To modify an SDH service, you can use the modification function of the T2000, or delete the
service and then create the cross-connection again.
7.4.2 Deleting SDH Services
You can delete an existing SDH service.
7.4.3 Changing Mount Ports of a Bridge
You can change the existing mount ports that need adjustment.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

7.4.4 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses

You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address aging
function. The MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network in the duration
of the aging time are regarded as having no route requirements. The MAC addresses are deleted
from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address table can contain more MAC addresses.
7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet Private Line Services
Ethernet private line services need to be deleted when the Ethernet boards that are configured
with the Ethernet private line services need to be deleted or when the service configuration is
incorrect.
7.4.6 Deleting EVPLAN Services
EVPLAN services need to be deleted when the Ethernet boards that are configured with the
EVPLAN services need to be deleted or when the configuration of the EVPLAN services is
incorrect.
7.4.7 Deleting EPLAN Services
EPLAN services need to be deleted when the Ethernet boards that are configured with the
EPLAN services need to be deleted or when the configuration of the EPLAN services is incorrect.

7.4.1 Modifying SDH Services

To modify an SDH service, you can use the modification function of the T2000, or delete the
service and then create the cross-connection again.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions
Performing this operation interrupts the service that you modify.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select a cross-connection and choose Display > Expand to Unidirectional.
Step 3 If the service to be modified is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the service that
you want to modify, and click Deactivate.

CAUTION
Deactivation will interrupt services.

Step 4 Click OK in the Confirm dialog box is displayed twice. The Operation Result dialog box is
displayed telling you that the operation was successful.
Step 5 Click Close.
Step 6 After the cross-connection is deactivated, modify the SDH service in the mode in Step 7 or Step
8.

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

NOTE

l By using the mode in Step 7, you can modify the source or sink of a service, but the source and sink
must be on the same board before and after the modification.
l If the modification requirement cannot be met in the mode in Step 7 (for example, a pass-through
service needs to be configured to the local through modification), you can delete the original service
and create the cross-connection again in the mode in Step 8, to achieve the modification.

Step 7 Optional: To modify the SDH service, choose Modify from the shortcut menu.
1. Select the service that you want to modify, right-click, and choose Modify from the shortcut
menu. The Modify SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
2. Modify Source VC4 or Sink VC4, Source Timeslot Range, and Sink Timeslot Range.
NOTE

In this mode, you can modify only Source VC4 or Sink VC4. The source VC4 and sink VC4 cannot
be modified at the same time.
3. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation
was successful.
4. Click Close.
5. Select the service that is modified, and click Activate.
6. Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
7. Click Close.

Step 8 Optional: To modify the SDH service, delete the service and then create the service again.
1. Select the service that you want to modify, and click Delete.
2. Click OK and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed telling you that the operation
was successful.
3. Click Close. The service is deleted.
4. Create the service again as required. For details, see 8.1 Creating SDH Services.

----End

7.4.2 Deleting SDH Services

You can delete an existing SDH service.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query to query existing services.

Step 3 Optional: If the service to be deleted is active, you should deactivate the service. Select the
service that you want to delete and click Deactivate.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-11

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

CAUTION
Deactivation will interrupt services.

Step 4 Select the desired service and click Delete.

Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box displayed, click OK.

Step 6 In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

7.4.3 Changing Mount Ports of a Bridge

You can change the existing mount ports that need adjustment.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The EPLAN service must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet
LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the Service Mount tab.

Step 3 To change a mount port, double-click Mount Port and select a new mount port from the drop-
down list.

Step 4 To modify a parameter of the mount port, double-click the parameter and select a new value
from the drop-down list.

Step 5 Click Apply. In the Operation Result dialog box displayed, click Close.

----End

7.4.4 Configuring the Aging Time for MAC Addresses

You can configure the aging time for MAC addresses, to realize the dynamic address aging
function. The MAC addresses that do not appear again in the transport network in the duration
of the aging time are regarded as having no route requirements. The MAC addresses are deleted
from the MAC address table, so that the MAC address table can contain more MAC addresses.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

Background Information
l If the aging time is too long, the MAC address table may save many outdated MAC address
items. This may use up the resources of the MAC address table. As a result, the MAC
address table may not be updated according to the change in the network.
l If the aging time is too short, the effective MAC address items may be deleted. As a result,
packets that are broadcasted cannot find the destination MAC address and the performance
of the network is affected.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Double-click MAC Address Aging Time and the MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is
displayed. Enter the value of the aging time.

Step 3 Click OK and then click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

7.4.5 Deleting Ethernet Private Line Services

Ethernet private line services need to be deleted when the Ethernet boards that are configured
with the Ethernet private line services need to be deleted or when the service configuration is
incorrect.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.

Step 3 Select the Ethernet private line service to be deleted and click Delete. Click OK in the
Warning dialog box that is displayed. Then, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful, that is, the Ethernet private line service is deleted successfully.

Step 4 Click Query to check whether the Ethernet private line service is deleted.

Step 5 See 7.4.2 Deleting SDH Services to delete the cross-connections of the Ethernet private line
service.

----End

7.4.6 Deleting EVPLAN Services

EVPLAN services need to be deleted when the Ethernet boards that are configured with the
EVPLAN services need to be deleted or when the configuration of the EVPLAN services is
incorrect.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-13

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher.

Background Information
Deleting an EVPLAN service involves the following:

1. Deleting the VLAN filtering table

2. Deleting the service mounting configurations

Context

CAUTION
When the VLAN filtering table is deleted, the VLAN unicast entries and disabled MAC address
entries are deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.

Step 3 Click the VLAN Filtering tab.

Step 4 Select the VLAN filtering entry to be deleted and click Delete.

Step 5 Click the Service Mount tab.

Step 6 Select the EVPLAN service to be deleted and click Delete. Click OK in the Prompt dialog box
that is displayed. Then, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful, that
is, the EVPLAN service is deleted successfully.

Step 7 Click Query to check whether the EVPLAN service is deleted.

Step 8 See 7.4.2 Deleting SDH Services to delete the cross-connections of the EVPLAN service.

----End

7.4.7 Deleting EPLAN Services

EPLAN services need to be deleted when the Ethernet boards that are configured with the
EPLAN services need to be deleted or when the configuration of the EPLAN services is incorrect.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher.

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 7 Modifying the Configuration Data

Context

CAUTION
When the EPLAN services are deleted, the VLAN unicast entries and disabled MAC address
entries are deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.

Step 3 Select the EPLAN service to be deleted and click Delete. Click OK in the Prompt dialog box
that is displayed. Then, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful, that
is, the EPLAN service is deleted successfully.

Step 4 Click Query to check whether the EPLAN service is deleted.

Step 5 See 7.4.2 Deleting SDH Services to delete the cross-connections of the EPLAN service.

----End

7.5 Modifying the Protection Subnet

This topic describes how to modify the configuration data of the existing protection subnet.

7.5.1 Deleting Protection Subnets

Before you delete an NE or a fiber cable connection on the T2000, you need to delete the related
protection subnets first.
7.5.2 Setting Protection Subnet Parameters
For the SDH equipment, you can set parameters for MSP protection subnet by using the
protection subnet maintenance function.

7.5.1 Deleting Protection Subnets

Before you delete an NE or a fiber cable connection on the T2000, you need to delete the related
protection subnets first.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.
l If one or more trails are configured in the protection subnet that you want to delete, delete
the trails first.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > SDH Protection Subnet Managementfrom the Main Menu.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-15

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
7 Modifying the Configuration Data Configuration Guide

Step 2 Right-click the protection subnet to be deleted and choose Delete from the NMorDelete from
the NEorDelete All from the NM from the short-cut menu.
NOTE

The methods to delete a protection subnet are as follows:

l Delete from the NM: Deletes the relation between the protection subnet and logical systems at the NE side,
to allow deleting of fibers, re-uploading, and so on. This command is not delivered to the NE and does not
affect the services. The deleted protection subnet can be located by using the search feature. The T2000
locates it according to the NE layer protection information.
l Delete from the NE: Deletes the protection subnet, logical systems at the NE side, and all traffic in the
protection subnet. The deleted protection subnet cannot be restored without being created again.
l Delete All from the NM: Deletes data other than fibers in the network layer. The deleted protection subnet
can be located by using the search feature. It is recommended that you do not select this option, as a large
amount of data can be deleted.

Step 3 In the Operation Promptdialog box, click Yes. After completion, the Operation Result dialog
box is displayed.
NOTE
If Delete from the NEis selected, you need to confirm the operation once more.

Step 4 ClickClose to complete the operation.

----End

7.5.2 Setting Protection Subnet Parameters

For the SDH equipment, you can set parameters for MSP protection subnet by using the
protection subnet maintenance function.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "network maintainer" authority or higher.
l On the T2000, the data of each NE must be configured, and fibers are created correctly.
l The MSP protection subnet must be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Protection Subnet > SDH Protection Subnet Maintenance from the Main Menu to
display the SDH Protection Subnet Common Attributes dialog box.
Step 2 Select an MSP protection subnet from the left pane. The attribute information of the protection
subnet is displayed in the right pane.
Step 3 Click the Protection Subnet Parameters tab.
Step 4 Click Query to query the parameters of the protection subnet in the MSP ring.
Step 5 Click the WTR Time(s) text box and enter a value.
NOTE
By default, enter 600. You can also enter a value from 300 to 720.

Step 6 Optional: Select SD Condition.

Step 7 Click Apply to display the Operation Result prompt box. Then click Close.

----End

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

8 Task Collection

About This Chapter

This topic describes each operation on the T2000 that is required during the service
configuration.
8.1 Creating SDH Services
To add or drop services between a processing board and a line board, thus realizing service
transmission in an SDH network, you need to create SDH cross-connections from the processing
board to the line board.
8.2 Creating SNCP Services
SNCP supports dual-fed and selective receiving of services. The SNCP is applicable to service
protection across subnets. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can create
SNCP services to protect services across subnets.
8.3 Configuring Trace Byte
The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the
transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same
vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters
previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.
8.4 Configuring C2 Byte
The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained
in the VC frame.
8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE
By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.
8.6 Checking the Configuration of SDH Services
According to the alarms reported on the T2000 and MSP switching status, you can check whether
the service configuration is correct. In addition, you can obtain the service switching time from
the SDH analyzer.
8.7 Configuring External Ports on Ethernet Boards
When an NE transmits Ethernet services through the external ports (that is, PORTs) on the
Ethernet board, you need to configure the attributes of the PORTs so that the PORTs can work

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

with the data communication equipment on the client side. This ensures that Ethernet services
can be accessed normally.
8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Ethernet Boards
When an NE transmits Ethernet services through the internal ports (that is, VCTRUNK ports)
on the Ethernet board to the SDH side, you need to configure the attributes of the VCTRUNK
ports so that the VCTRUNK ports can work with the Ethernet board on the opposite equipment.
This ensures that the transmission of the Ethernet services on the SDH network is normal.
8.9 Configuring Bound Paths
You can set the bandwidth and direction of a VCTRUNK by setting a bound path.
8.10 Creating Ethernet Private Line Services and Ethernet Virtual Private Line Services
When an Ethernet switching board carries private line services, the relevant information of the
private line services, such as the service source and service sink, must be specified.
8.11 Creating EPLAN Services and EVPLAN Services
When an Ethernet switching board carries LAN services, you need to create the bridge and set
the attributes of the bridge and the port mounted to the bridge.
8.12 Creating VLANs Filtering
In the case of Ethernet LAN services, when the type of the bridge is IEEE 802.1q or IEEE
802.1ad, the VLAN filtering table needs to be created for the bridge if VLANs are used to isolate
the data of different users.
8.13 Creating VLAN Unicast
You can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specified
MAC address to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN.
8.14 Disabling an MAC Address
You can disable an MAC address. As a result, this address receives no packets even in the same
VLAN.
8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels
If network cables are incorrectly connected or are faulty, the Ethernet service channels become
faulty. This affects the services. Hence, the Ethernet service channels must be normal.
8.16 Adjusting Concatenated Timeslots
To improve the utilization of lower order cross-connection timeslots, you can adjust
concatenated timeslots.
8.17 Optimizing Higher Order Pass-Through
After enabling the optimization of higher order pass-through, you can use higher order cross-
connections to realize the lower order services that do not require lower order cross-connection
resources. In this manner, the lower order cross-connection resources are saved.
8.18 Deleting the Lower Order Cross-Connect Protection Group
After the lower order cross-connect protection group is deleted, lower order cross-connect
services cannot be configured normally.
8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board
of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure.
When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the
FLASH of the SCC board. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board
automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the configuration to the
boards.
8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE
database to a CF card automatically, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after
the data loss on the SCC board of the NE or equipment power failure.
8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card
You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE
database to a CF card manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the
data loss on the SCC board of the NE or equipment power failure.
8.22 Checking the Network Communication Status
On some occasions, the T2000 cannot manage some NEs during the running of the network. By
checking the communication status of the network, you can know the communication status
between the T2000 and NEs.
8.23 Viewing the Clock Trace Search
Correct clock trace relations are critical to ensure the clock synchronization within the entire
network. Using the T2000, you can learn about and monitor the clock trace status of each NE.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

8.1 Creating SDH Services

To add or drop services between a processing board and a line board, thus realizing service
transmission in an SDH network, you need to create SDH cross-connections from the processing
board to the line board.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l For VC12 or VC3 services, the GXCL or EXCL board that supports lower order cross-
connection must be installed in the OSN 9500, and the lower order cross-connect protection
pair must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query SDH services from the NE.
Step 3 Click Create and set the required parameters in the Create SDH Service dialog box that is
displayed.

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Step 4 Click OK, the SDH service is created.

----End

8.2 Creating SNCP Services

SNCP supports dual-fed and selective receiving of services. The SNCP is applicable to service
protection across subnets. When configuring SDH services on a per-NE basis, you can create
SNCP services to protect services across subnets.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l For VC12 or VC3 services, the GXCL or EXCL board that supports lower order cross-
connection must be installed in the OSN 9500, and the lower order cross-connect protection
pair must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration
from the Function Tree.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Step 2 Click Query to query services from the NE.

Step 3 Click Create SNCP Service and the Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the parameters such as Service Type, Direction, Level, Working Service, and Protection
Service, and click OK. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation was successful.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

8.3 Configuring Trace Byte

The trace byte is used by the receive end to confirm if it has a continuous connection with the
transmit end. The trace byte can be set to any identical character for equipment of the same
vendor but if the equipment is from different vendors, the trace byte must be set to the characters
previously specified to ensure successful interconnection.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l When the cross-connections of the VC12, VC3 or VC4 levels are created, you can query
or set the trace byte of the VC12, VC3 or VC4.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the type of the trace byte.

If you need to configure Perform the following operations

J0 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >

Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead
from the Function Tree.

J1 byte l In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path
Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1
tab.
l In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path
Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J1
tab.

J2 byte In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration >

Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the
Function Tree. Click the Trace Byte J2 tab.

Step 2 Click Options and the Options dialog box is displayed. Select the processing mode for the read
and write attributes of the overhead bytes.

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

NOTE

l You cannot select the mode for the J0 byte.

l The T2000has two kinds of processing modes for the read and write attributes of the overhead bytes:
Extended Mode and Standard Mode. The T2000has a stronger processing ability for the read and
write attributes of the overhead bytes in the extended mode than in the standard mode.

Step 3 Right-click the trace byte and choose the input mode.

If you choose Perform the following operations

Copy All Form Received Click Copy All Form Received.

Manual Input Click Manual Input and the Please input the overhead byte
dialog box is displayed. Choose Byte Mode and Input Mode and
enter the value of the trace byte. Click OK.

NOTE

l Choose Copy All Form Received and the contents of the trace byte received are automatically copied
to the table.
l Choose Manual Input to customize the contents of the trace byte.

Step 4 Click Apply. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

8.4 Configuring C2 Byte

The C2 byte indicates the multiplexing structure of the VC frame and the service types contained
in the VC frame.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
l The cross-connection must be created on the NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Select the service level of the C2 byte.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-7

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

If the service level of the C2 byte is Perform the following operations

VC4 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4
Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the
Signal Flag C2 tab.

VC3 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3
Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Click the
Signal Flag C2 tab.

Step 2 Click Options and the Options dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Switch Mode to Extended Mode and click OK.

NOTE

l The mode must be set to Extended Mode. You can then set the C2 byte.
l The T2000 has two kinds of processing modes for the read and write attributes of the overhead bytes,
which are Extended Mode and Standard Mode. The T2000 has a stronger processing ability for the
read and write attributes of the overhead bytes in the extended mode than in the standard mode.

Step 4 Set the values of C2 to be Sent and C2 to be Received.

Step 5 Click Apply and the Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK and a prompt appears telling you that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

8.5 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

NE time is synchronized with the T2000 server.

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Performance > NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Select one or more NEs from the NE list. Click .

Step 3 Select the NE, and set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters according to the
requirement.
NOTE

l The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end time must
be later than the start time.
l If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time and does
not stop.

Step 4 Click Apply and click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

8.6 Checking the Configuration of SDH Services

According to the alarms reported on the T2000 and MSP switching status, you can check whether
the service configuration is correct. In addition, you can obtain the service switching time from
the SDH analyzer.

Prerequisite
l The physical topology of the network must be created.
l The NEs, boards, and fibers must be created on the T2000.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-9

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

l The SDH analyzers must be correctly connected to the source NE and the sink NE, and the
corresponding service type and rate must be configured.
l You must be an NM user with "NE and network administrator" authority or higher.

Background Information
After the service type and rate are set on the SDH analyzer, the "SIGNAL" and "FRAME"
indicators changes from red to green and then are constantly on. If no alarm indicator blinks on
the SDH analyzer, it indicates that the SDH analyzer is connected to the network correctly.

Test Connection Diagram

As shown in Figure 8-1, the SDH analyzers are connected to the source end and sink end of the
network to be tested. At the same time, the T2000 must be connected properly to the network
to be tested.

Figure 8-1 Test connection diagram

T2000

SDH ring
Source SDH analyzer Sink SDH analyzer
Source NE1 Sink NE2

Precautions
Optical attenuators need to be added at the "IN" and "OUT" optical interfaces on the board that
is directly connected to the SDH analyzer. In this case, the optical attenuators can prevent the
damage due to excessive optical power on the SDH analyzer and board.

Procedure
Step 1 Enable the SDH analyzer at the source end and the SDH analyzer at the sink end to monitor the
service switching on the network.

Step 2 In the Main Topology of the T2000, right-click the source NE and choose NE Explorer. Select
the line board for service transmission from the Object Tree on the left pane. Then, choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Set Laser Switch to Close in the pane on the right.

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Step 4 Click Apply. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that is displayed. Click OK in the Prompt
that is displayed.
NOTE
By performing Steps 2-4, you can shut down the laser that transmits services at the source end. In this case,
the service on the working path is interrupted and the service switching condition is met.

Step 5 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu on the T2000.

Step 6 Click OK in the Filter dialog box that is displayed. In the Current Alarms window, you can
browse the R_LOS alarm reported by the line board of the sink NE that is directly connected to
the line board of the source NE and the LASER_SHUT alarm reported by the source NE. For
the meanings of the alarms and processing methods, see the Alarms Reference.

Step 7 Read the service interruption time displayed on the RESULT TS window on the SDH analyzer,
which is equal to the service switching time.
NOTE
On the SDH analyzer, the LONGEST and SHORTEST parameters in the RESULT TS window record
the longest switching time and the shortest switching time when the switching is performed for multiple
times. The LAST parameter records the time of the latest switching.

Step 8 Query the switching state and service status on the T2000 to check whether the configuration is
correct.
NOTE
Querying the MSP switching status is different from querying the SNCP switching status. Refer to Steps
9-11 to query the MSP service status. Refer to Steps 12 and 13 to query the SNCP service status.

Step 9 Choose Protection Subnet > SDH Protection Subnet Maintenance from the Main Menu of
the T2000.

Step 10 Click the Protection Subnet Maintenance tab on the right side of the SDH Protection Subnet
Common Attributes pane. Query East Status and West Status. If the status is Signal Fail
Switching - Ring or Lockout of protection-Span, the MSP switching is successful.

Step 11 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu on the T2000. If no service alarm
is reported from the working path, the service switching is successful.
NOTE
According to the verification result obtained by performing Steps 10 and 11, the service configuration on
the MSP ring is successful.

Step 12 In the Main Topology of the T2000, right-click the NE to be queried, and choose NE
Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

Step 13 Query Current Status, Trail Status, and Active Channel from the Working Service list and
Protection Service list on the right pane to check whether the services are switched successfully.
NOTE

The service switching and SNCP service configuration are successful if the following conditions are met:
l The current status is SF switching.
l The status of the working service path is SF.
l The status of the protection service path is normal.
l The current path is the protection path.

----End

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-11

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

8.7 Configuring External Ports on Ethernet Boards

When an NE transmits Ethernet services through the external ports (that is, PORTs) on the
Ethernet board, you need to configure the attributes of the PORTs so that the PORTs can work
with the data communication equipment on the client side. This ensures that Ethernet services
can be accessed normally.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The Ethernet board must be created.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select External Port.
Step 3 Configure the basic attributes of the external ports.
1. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
2. Set the basic attributes of the external ports.

NOTE

Working mode: By default, the working mode is auto-negotiation. That is, the transmit port and
receive port operate in the working mode of the highest level through pulse negotiation signals
between them. The transmit port and receive port must have the same working mode settings.
Otherwise, this results in the failure of services
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Set the flow control mode of the port.
1. Click the Flow Control tab.
2. Set the flow control mode of the port.

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

NOTE

l Auto-negotiation flow control mode: Select this flow control mode when the working mode of
the port is auto-negotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means that flow control frames
are transmitted instead of being received. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that PAUSE
frames can be transmitted and received. Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means
that the auto-negotiation determines whether to adopt the symmetric or dissymmetric flow
control.
l Non-auto-negotiation flow control mode: Select this flow control mode when the working mode
of the port is not auto-negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that PAUSE frames
can be transmitted and received. Send Only means that PAUSE frames can be transmitted only.
Receive Only means that PAUSE frames can be received only.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Set the tag attributes of external ports.
NOTE

Ethernet transparent transmission boards do not support the tag attributes.

1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2. Set the tag attributes of external ports.

3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set the network attributes of external ports.
NOTE

Ethernet transparent transmission boards do not support the tag attributes.

1. Click the Network Attributes tab.
2. Set the network attributes of external ports.

Figure 8-2 Attributes of external ports on the Ethernet boards that support the QinQ function

NOTE

l If the port is of the UNI type, the port processes the tag attributes in 802.1Q. The port attributes
include Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid.
l If the port is of the C-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. In this
case, the port determines that the data packets do not carry the S-VLAN tags and processes the
VLAN tags of the received packets by considering all the VLAN tags as C-VLAN tags.
l If the port is of the S-Aware type, the port does not process the tag attributes in 802.1Q. In this
case, the port determines that the data packets do not carry the C-VLAN tag and processes the
VLAN tags of the received packets by considering all the VLAN tags as S-VLAN tags.
3. Click Apply.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-13

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Step 7 Set the advanced attributes of external ports.

NOTE

Ethernet transparent transmission boards do not support the tag attributes.

1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
2. Set the advanced attributes of external ports.

3. Click Apply.

----End

8.8 Configuring Internal Ports on Ethernet Boards

When an NE transmits Ethernet services through the internal ports (that is, VCTRUNK ports)
on the Ethernet board to the SDH side, you need to configure the attributes of the VCTRUNK
ports so that the VCTRUNK ports can work with the Ethernet board on the opposite equipment.
This ensures that the transmission of the Ethernet services on the SDH network is normal.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The corresponding Ethernet board must be created.

Precautions

CAUTION
Incorrect configuration of binding paths may cause service interruption.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select Internal Port.

Step 3 Set the tag attributes of internal ports.

1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2. Set the tag attributes of internal ports.

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Set the network attributes of internal ports.
1. Click the Network Attributes tab.
2. Set the network attributes of internal ports.

Figure 8-3 Attributes of internal ports on the Ethernet boards that support the QinQ function

3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Set the encapsulation/mapping protocol for the internal ports.
1. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
2. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.

NOTE

l Mapping Protocol of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards at both ends of the transmission
line and the protocol parameters must be consistent.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Configure the LCAS function of internal ports.
1. Click the LCAS tab.
2. Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters.

NOTE

Enabling LCAS of the VCTRUNKs on the Ethernet boards at both ends of the transmission line and
the LCAS protocol parameters must be consistent.
3. Click Apply.
Step 7 Set the binding path for a port.
1. Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration and the Bound Path Configuration
dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a VCTRUNK port from the Configurable Ports drop-down list. In the Available

Bound Paths area, select the times lot of the bearer layer and click .
3. Click OK and then click Yes. A prompt appears telling you that the operation was
successful.
4. Click Close.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-15

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Step 8 Set the advanced attributes of internal ports.

1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
2. Set the advanced attributes of internal ports.

3. Click Apply.

----End

8.9 Configuring Bound Paths

You can set the bandwidth and direction of a VCTRUNK by setting a bound path.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The Ethernet board must be created.

Precautions
Configuring the bound path may interrupt services.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Internal Port option
button.
Step 2 Click the Bound Path tab. Click Configuration, and the Bound Path Configuration dialog
box is displayed.
Step 3 Select the VCTRUNK port you want to bind from Configurable Ports. Select the bearer layer
path from the Available Bound Paths combo box. Click .
NOTE
Refer to the actual service requirement to select the level of the bound path.

Step 4 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click Yes, and click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

8.10 Creating Ethernet Private Line Services and Ethernet

Virtual Private Line Services
When an Ethernet switching board carries private line services, the relevant information of the
private line services, such as the service source and service sink, must be specified.

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the proper operation from the following options according to the type of the Ethernet
private line service to be created.

Option Description
EPL service Go to Step 3.
EVPL (QinQ) service Select Display QinQ Shared Service.

Step 3 Click New.

The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the private line service.

Step 5 Set the attributes of the source port and sink port.

Step 6 Set the VC paths to be bound with the internal ports.

1. Click Configuration.
The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the bound port.
3. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths.

4. Select Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .

5. Repeat Steps Step 6.2 to Step 6.4 and bind VC paths with other VCTRUNKs.
6. Click OK. Click Yes in the Hint dialog box that is displayed. Then, the Operation
Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
NOTE

The timeslots on the transmission line, which correspond to the paths bound with the VCTRUNKs
at both ends of the transmission line, must be consistent.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-17

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

----End

8.11 Creating EPLAN Services and EVPLAN Services

When an Ethernet switching board carries LAN services, you need to create the bridge and set
the attributes of the bridge and the port mounted to the bridge.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE or network operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.
The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge.

Step 4 Configure service mounting relations.

8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Option Description
Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE Go to Step Step 5.
802.1q bridge.
Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Go to Step Step 6.

Step 5 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1d or IEEE 802.1q bridge.
1. Click Configure Mount.

2. Select Available Mounted Ports and click .

3. Optional: Repeat Step Step 5.2 and select the other ports to be mounted.

4. Click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Configure the services that are mounted to the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
1. Click Configure Mount.
2. Set the parameters for configuring the mounted services.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-19

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

3. Click Add Mount Port.

4. Repeat Steps Step 6.2 to Step 6.3 to add the other mount ports.
5. Click OK.
Step 7 Set the VC paths to be bound with the internal ports.
1. Click Configuration.
The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as bound port.
3. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths.

4. Select Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click .

5. Repeat Steps Step 7.2 to Step 7.4 and bind VC paths with other VCTRUNKs.
6. Click OK.
NOTE

The timeslots on the transmission line, which correspond to the paths bound with the VCTRUNKs
at both ends of the transmission line, must be consistent.

8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

----End

8.12 Creating VLANs Filtering

In the case of Ethernet LAN services, when the type of the bridge is IEEE 802.1q or IEEE
802.1ad, the VLAN filtering table needs to be created for the bridge if VLANs are used to isolate
the data of different users.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The bridge and mount ports must be created.
Make sure that you set Bridge Switch Mode to IVL/Ingress Filter Enable. Only in this way,
you can create VLAN filtering tables

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN dialog box is displayed. Enter a VLAN ID, select an Available
forwarding ports, and then click .

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-21

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Step 3 Click [Link] Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

Step 4 Create other VLAN filtering tables as required.

----End

8.13 Creating VLAN Unicast

You can configure VLAN unicast, to allow a packet whose destination address is the specified
MAC address to be forwarded through the specified port in the specified VLAN.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Unicast tab.
Step 2 Click New and the Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID, MAC
Address, and Physical Port, by double-clicking or entering the corresponding values.

8-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

CAUTION
The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.

Step 3 Click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

8.14 Disabling an MAC Address

You can disable an MAC address. As a result, this address receives no packets even in the same
VLAN.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Precautions
This operation may interrupt the service.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service >
Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click the Disable MAC Address tab.

Step 2 Click New and the Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed. Set VLAN ID
and MAC Address.

NOTE
The first byte of the MAC Address of VLAN unicast must be even.

Step 3 Click OK and then click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

----End

8.15 Testing Ethernet Service Channels

If network cables are incorrectly connected or are faulty, the Ethernet service channels become
faulty. This affects the services. Hence, the Ethernet service channels must be normal.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-23

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Prerequisite
The Ethernet services must be created and activated.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Two laptops on which the Windows operating system is installed, two network cables

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 8-4 shows the connection for testing the Ethernet service channels.
If an Ethernet service is configured between NE1 and NE3, you can connect the two laptops to
the Ethernet boards by using the network cables and perform a ping test.

Figure 8-4 Connection for testing the Ethernet service channels

Laptop A

T2000

NE3

NE2 NE4

NE1

Laptop B

8-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Precautions
NOTE

TAG of the external ports on the Ethernet boards at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet
service must be set to Access. In addition, Default VLAN ID of the external ports on the Ethernet boards
at the source and sink ends of the accessed Ethernet service must be set to the same value.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the external ports on the Ethernet boards to the network ports of the laptops at the source
and sink ends of the service by using network cables, according to the test connection diagram.

Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop A and laptop B. Ensure that the two IP addresses are in the same
network segment.
l Set an IP address for laptop A.
– IP address: [Link]
– Subnet mask: [Link]
l Set an IP address for laptop B.
– IP address: [Link]
– Subnet mask: [Link]

CAUTION
The IP addresses cannot be set to the loopback addresses within the [Link] network segment.

Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop A. Then, a dialog box is displayed. Enter the ping command
ping [Link].

Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.

l If the information in the displayed window contains "Lost = 0 (0% loss)", it indicates that no
packet is lost and the Ethernet channels are normal.
l If the displayed window returns the message Request timed out, it indicates that the Ethernet
channels are abnormal. Check the connection of the network cables and the configuration of
the Ethernet services. If the cable connection or service configuration is incorrect, rectify the
fault and then continue the test.

----End

8.16 Adjusting Concatenated Timeslots

To improve the utilization of lower order cross-connection timeslots, you can adjust
concatenated timeslots.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-25

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Background Information
Services are created in different orders. Therefore, the allocation of lower order resources is not
always optimum. By adjusting concatenated timeslots of lower order services, you can optimize
the allocation of lower order cross-connection timeslots according to the data such as service
association. This improves the utilization of lower order cross-connection timeslots.

Precautions
Adjusting concatenated timeslots may interrupt services.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the
Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Adjust Concatenated Timeslot. The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Click OK. The operation result dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click Close.

----End

8.17 Optimizing Higher Order Pass-Through

After enabling the optimization of higher order pass-through, you can use higher order cross-
connections to realize the lower order services that do not require lower order cross-connection
resources. In this manner, the lower order cross-connection resources are saved.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

Precautions
After you enable the optimization of higher order pass-through, services may be interrupted
during the optimization process.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the
Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Optimize Higher Order Pass-Trough. The Optimize Higher Order Pass-Trough
dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select Enabled.

Step 4 Click OK. The operation result dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click Close.

----End

8-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

8.18 Deleting the Lower Order Cross-Connect Protection

Group
After the lower order cross-connect protection group is deleted, lower order cross-connect
services cannot be configured normally.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.
l The lower order cross-connect protection group must be created.
l Deleting the lower order cross-connect protection group is applicable in the case of the
OptiX OSN 9500.

Precautions
If lower order SDH services are configured, you need to delete the lower order SDH services or
switch the lower order SDH services to another lower order cross-connect protection group
before deleting the lower order cross-connect protection group.

Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection
from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the lower order cross-connect protection group to be deleted from 1+1 Protection List.
Then, click Delete.

Step 3 Then, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

----End

8.19 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board
of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure.
When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the
FLASH of the SCC board. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board
automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the configuration to the
boards.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-27

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

Step 3 In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs.

Step 4 Choose Back Up NE Data > Back Up Database to SCC.

NOTE
Backing up the database may takes about 30 minutes.

Step 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.

Step 6 The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. After the backup is successful, click Close.

----End

8.20 Automatically Backing Up the NE Database to a CF

Card
You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE
database to a CF card automatically, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after
the data loss on the SCC board of the NE or equipment power failure.

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l Log in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level" authority.
l The SCC board must be configured with the CF card.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

Step 3 Select one or more NEs in the Configuration Data Management List.

Step 4 Choose Back Up NE Data > Automatically Back Up to CF Card. The Automatically Back
Up NE Data to CF Card window is displayed. Set the Automatic Backup Enabling Status
and Automatic Backup Period(min).
NOTE

Before the setting, you can click Query to query the current status of the automatic backup of NE data to
a CF card.

Step 5 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.

----End

8.21 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE
database to a CF card manually, to ensure the automatic restoration of the operation after the
data loss on the SCC board of the NE or equipment power failure.

8-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 8 Task Collection

Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
l Log in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level" authority.
l The SCC board must be configured with the CF card.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.

Step 2 In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

Step 3 Select one or more NEs in the Configuration Data Management List.
Step 4 Choose Back Up NE Data > Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.
Step 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
Step 6 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed.

----End

8.22 Checking the Network Communication Status

On some occasions, the T2000 cannot manage some NEs during the running of the network. By
checking the communication status of the network, you can know the communication status
between the T2000 and NEs.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

Background Information
If you know the IP address or the NSAP address of an NE, you can choose File > Ping from the
Main Menu to use the ping command to check the communication status of the NE.

Procedure
l Check the communication status between the T2000 and a non-gateway NE.
1. Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE tab. Click Refresh to view the communication status of all the non-
gateway NEs.
3. Select an NE. Right-click in the Communication Status column and choose Test
NE from the shortcut menu.
4. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating the test result of the non-
gateway NE.
l Check the communication status between the T2000 and the GNE.
1. Choose System > DCN Management from the Main Menu.
2. Click the GNE tab. Click Refresh to view the communication status of the GNE.
3. Right-click an NE and choose Test GNE from the shortcut menu.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-29

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
8 Task Collection Configuration Guide

4. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating the test result of the GNE.
----End

8.23 Viewing the Clock Trace Search

Correct clock trace relations are critical to ensure the clock synchronization within the entire
network. Using the T2000, you can learn about and monitor the clock trace status of each NE.

Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Clock View, right-click and choose Clock Trace Search from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.
Step 3 If the clock trace relation changes, the Prompt dialog box is displayed, asking you whether to
refresh the clock trace relation. Click Yes. When the search for the clock trace relation is
complete, the Clock View displays the refreshed clock trace status.
NOTE

If you right-click in the Clock View and choose Disable Clock Status Change Prompting from the
shortcut menu, the Prompt dialog box is not displayed even when the clock trace relation changes.

Step 4 In the Clock View, right-click and choose Query Networkwide Clock Synchronization
Status from the shortcut menu, to refresh the clock tracing relation.

----End

8-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 9 Equipment Information

9 Equipment Information

About This Chapter

You need to consider the service support capability of the boards used by the equipment and the
configuration requirements during the configuration process.
9.1 Service Support Capability of Ethernet Boards
Ethernet boards are classified into Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet
switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services, whereas the Ethernet switching boards support
EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching function.
9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet Boards
One VCTRUNK on an Ethernet board can only be bound with timeslots of the same level.
9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of Ethernet Boards
To determine the level of the bandwidths to be bound with a VCTRUNK and the number of
required paths that are required for an Ethernet service, you need to calculate theoretical
bandwidth of the Ethernet service that can be carried by a VCTRUNK.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
9 Equipment Information Configuration Guide

9.1 Service Support Capability of Ethernet Boards

Ethernet boards are classified into Ethernet transparent transmission boards and Ethernet
switching boards, based on the type of the accessed services. The Ethernet transparent
transmission boards support only EPL services, whereas the Ethernet switching boards support
EPL services, EVPL services, and Layer 2 switching function.

Table 9-1 Service support capability of Ethernet boards

Board Type Board Name Supported Ethernet Private Supported Ethernet LAN
Line Service Service

Ethernet transparent GE06 EPL -

transmission board
EGT6A EPL -

EGT6 EPL -

EGTH EPL -

Ethernet switching EGS8 EPL EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q

board EVPL (QinQ) bridge), EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d
bridge), and EVPLAN (IEEE
802.1ad bridge)

EAS1 EPL EVPLAN (IEEE 802.1q

EVPL (QinQ) bridge), EPLAN (IEEE 802.1d
bridge), and EVPLAN (IEEE
802.1ad bridge)

9.2 Requirements for Binding Paths with VCTRUNKs on

Ethernet Boards
One VCTRUNK on an Ethernet board can only be bound with timeslots of the same level.

Table 9-2 Requirements for binding paths with VCTRUNKs on Ethernet boards

Board Requirement for Binding Paths with a VCTRUNK

l The VCTRUNKs can be bound with the VC-3 paths and VC-4 paths and cannot be bound
with VC4-xc paths.
l VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 can only be bound with the first to sixteenth VC-4s, namely,
VC4-1 to VC4-16.
l VCTRUNK3 and VCTRUNK4 can only be bound with the seventeenth to thirty-second
VC-4s, namely, VC4-17 to VC4-32.
l VCTRUNK5 and VCTRUNK6 can only be bound with the thirty-third to forty-eighth
GE06 VC-4s, namely, VC4-33 to VC4-48.

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 9 Equipment Information

Board Requirement for Binding Paths with a VCTRUNK

EGT6A l The VCTRUNKs can be bound with the VC-3 paths and VC-4 paths and cannot be bound
with VC4-xc paths.
l VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 can be bound only with the first to sixteenth VC-4s, namely,
VC4-1 to VC4-16.
l VCTRUNK3 and VCTRUNK4 can be bound only with the seventeenth to thirty-second
VC-4s, namely, VC4-17 to VC4-32.
l VCTRUNK5 and VCTRUNK6 can be bound only with the thirty-third to forty-eight VC-4s,
namely, VC4-33 to VC4-48.

EGT6 l The VCTRUNKs can be bound with the VC-3 paths and VC-4 paths and cannot be bound
with VC4-xc paths.
l VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 can only be bound with the first to sixteenth VC-4s, namely,
VC4-1 to VC4-16.
l VCTRUNK3 and VCTRUNK4 can only be bound with the seventeenth to thirty-second
VC-4s, namely, VC4-17 to VC4-32.
l VCTRUNK5 and VCTRUNK6 can only be bound with the thirty-third to forty-eighth
VC-4s, namely, VC4-33 to VC4-48.

EGTH l The VCTRUNKs can be bound with the VC-3 paths and VC-4 paths and cannot be bound
with VC4-xc paths.
l A maximum of 16 VCTRUNKs (namely, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16) are supported. A
maximum of 128 VC-4s (namely, VC4-1 to VC4-128) are available to be bound with the
VCTRUNKs.
l VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 can be bound only with the first to sixteenth VC-4s, namely,
VC4-1 to VC4-16.
l VCTRUNK3 and VCTRUNK4 can only be bound with the seventeenth to thirty-second
VC-4s, namely, VC4-17 to VC4-32.
l VCTRUNK5 and VCTRUNK6 can only be bound with the thirty-third to forty-eighth
VC-4s, namely, VC4-33 to VC4-48.
l VCTRUNK7 and VCTRUNK8 can only be bound with the forty-ninth to sixty-fourth
VC-4s, namely, VC4-49 to VC4-64.
l VCTRUNK9 and VCTRUNK10 can only be bound with the sixty-fifth to eightieth VC-4s,
namely, VC4-65 to VC4-80.
l VCTRUNK11 and VCTRUNK12 can only be bound with the eighty-first to ninety-sixth
VC-4s, namely, VC4-81 to VC4-96.
l VCTRUNK13 and VCTRUNK14 can only be bound with the ninety-seventh to hundred-
twelfth VC-4s, namely, VC4-97 to VC4-112.
l VCTRUNK15 and VCTRUNK16 can only be bound with the hundred-thirteenth to
hundred-twenty-eighth VC-4s, namely, VC4-113 to VC4-128.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
9 Equipment Information Configuration Guide

Board Requirement for Binding Paths with a VCTRUNK

EGS8 l The VCTRUNKs can be bound with the VC-3 paths, VC-4 paths, and VC4-xc paths.
l A maximum of 16 VCTRUNKs (namely, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16) are supported. A
maximum of 64 VC-4s (namely, VC4-1 to VC4-64) are available to be bound with the
VCTRUNKs.
l There are no limits on the timeslots that need to be bound with the VCTRUNKs, if the
available paths are at the VC-3 or VC-4 level.
l Only four consecutive VC-4s (for example, VC4-5 to VC4-8) can be bound, if the available
paths are at the VC4-xc level.

EAS1 l The VCTRUNKs can be bound with the VC-3 paths, VC-4 paths, and VC4-xc paths.
l A maximum of 24 VCTRUNKs (namely, VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK16) are supported. A
maximum of 64 VC-4s (namely, VC4-1 to VC4-64) are available to be bound with the
VCTRUNKs.
l There are no limits on the timeslots that need to be bound with the VCTRUNKs, if the
available paths are at the VC-3 or VC-4 level.
l Only four consecutive VC-4s (for example, VC4-5 to VC4-8) can be bound, if the available
paths are at the VC4-xc level.

9.3 Ethernet Service Bandwidths Carried by VCTRUNKs of

Ethernet Boards
To determine the level of the bandwidths to be bound with a VCTRUNK and the number of
required paths that are required for an Ethernet service, you need to calculate theoretical
bandwidth of the Ethernet service that can be carried by a VCTRUNK.
Bandwidth = Number of paths bound with the VCTRUNK x Payload rate of the binding
granularity x Encapsulation efficiency of the encapsulation protocol x (Ethernet frame length +
Frame interval length)/Ethernet frame length.
The payload rate of the VC-12 is 2.176 Mbit/s and the payload rate of the VC-3 is 48.384 Mbit/
s. The frame interval length is fixed to 20 bytes.
GFP encapsulation efficiency has different values in the following two scenarios:
l GFP encapsulation efficiency = Ethernet frame length/(Ethernet frame length + 12-byte
overhead), when the GFP protocol uses FCS32 as the check field.
l GFP encapsulation efficiency = Ethernet frame length/(Ethernet frame length + 8-byte
overhead), when the GFP protocol does not add the check field.

NOTE

When the Ethernet board uses the GFP protocol to encapsulate Ethernet services, you can determine
whether a check field is used during the encapsulation by setting the Check Field Length parameter. By
default, FCS32 is used as the check field. In this case, if the Ethernet board uses the default GFP parameter
settings, the theoretical bandwidth of the VCTRUNK bound with five VC-12 paths is 10.938 Mbit/s when
the Ethernet frame length is 1500 bytes and the theoretical bandwidth of the VCTRUNK bound with five
VC-12 paths is 12.025 bit/s when the Ethernet frame length is 64 bytes.

In actual application scenarios, you can roughly estimate the level and quantity of the path
according to the following principle. That is, 2 Mbit/s services are carried in a VC-12 path and

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide 9 Equipment Information

48 Mbit/s services are carried in a VC-3 path. For example, in the case of a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet
service, the VCTRUNK can be bound with five VC-12 paths.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide A Glossary

A Glossary

Numerics

1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working
SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.

Auto-negotiation The rate/work mode of the communication party set as self-negotiation is

specified through negotiation according to the transmission rate of the
opposite party.

Back up Copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original is
damaged or corrupted.

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that

minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.
Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.

Bound path The VC Trunk refers to the 2 Mbps paths which are bound together to
transmit Ethernet data. The VC Trunk is an entity between the Ethernet
port and the 2 Mbps path.

CAR Committed Access Rate. The CAR limits the input or output transmission
rate on an interface.

ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations

channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel
(DCC) as its physical layer.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
A Glossary Configuration Guide

EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection

between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth
is never shared between different customers.

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLAN service is both a LAN service and a
private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different
customers.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both
a line service and a virtual private service.

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLAN service is a

service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.

Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers.
It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different
physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet
usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet
networks.

FEC Forward error correction, It is a kind of technology for enhancing the

reliability of digital transmission. It can increase transmission distance
and improve network performance.

Gateway IP IP address is used for TCP/IP communication between an NE and the

T2000, which is effective only when it is used for TCP/IP communication.
That is, only the gateway NE needs the IP address. IP address cannot be
used to identify an NE uniquely. NEs in different TCP/IP networks may
have the same IP address. And one NE may have several IP addresses (for
example: an IP address of a dial-up network, an IP address of the Ethernet
port and so on).

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features flexible

bandwidth and dynamic adjustment. In addition, it provides a failure
tolerance mechanism, which enhances the viability of virtual
concatenations and enables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-
service affecting).

Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fiber can be located by setting
loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback
modes: No loopback, Outloop, Inloop.

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide A Glossary

MSTP Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH platform,

capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM
services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of
these services.

NE database The system control board has two types of databases: (1) DRDB: running
database, with no battery power supply; (2) FDB0 and FDB1: permanent
databases in the flash ROM. When an NE works properly, the NE
configuration data is stored in the DRDB, NVFLDB, FDB0, FDB1, and
CFDB databases. During NE database backup, the NE configuration data
is copied from the DRDB database to the FDB0 and FDB1 databases.
After being power recycled, an NE recovers its configuration data from
the NVFLDB database by default. If the NVFLDB database loses its data
due to battery power exhaustion, the NE recovers its configuration data
from the FDB0 or FDB1 database.

NNI Network Node Interface. NNI identifies the interface between the ATM
network nodes. See also SDH NNI.

Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators and

maintenance engineers work in each working station.

RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal.

It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-
point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.
2kbit/s.

RS422 The interface can change to RS232 through the hardware jumper and
others are the same as RS232.

RSTP The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol is an evolution of the Spanning Tree
Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology
change.

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport

structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads
over physical transmission networks.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
A Glossary Configuration Guide

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is

replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working
subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required
level.

SNCMP Subnetwork connection multipath [Link] only difference is that

SNCP is of 1+1 protection and SNCMP is of N+1 protection. That is,
several backup channels protect one active channel in SNCMP.

SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection. SNCTP provides a VC-4

level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty, the services
of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.

SSM Synchronization Status Message. ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the

network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of
the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of
synchronization quality grades.

STP STP is a protocol that provides a loop free topology for any bridged LAN
and is used in switched networks to prevent loops.

Subnet mask Also referred to as the network mask off code, it is used to define network
segments, so that only the computers in the same network segment can
communicate with one another, thus suppressing broadcast storm between
different network segments.

Subnet Subnetwork is the logical entity in the transmission network and

comprises a group of network management objects. A subnetwork can
contain NEs and other subnetworks. A subnetwork planning can better
the organization of a network view.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Common name for the

suite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide
internet networks.

Timeslot Single timeslot on an E1 digital interface—that is, a 64-kbps,

synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice
connection.

Trail A network level management functions of the T2000. Through trail

management management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic
function interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail,
filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a
centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and
print a trail report.

UNI UNI is the abbreviation for User Network Interface. It identifies the
interface between the user and the ATM network node.

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide A Glossary

VLAN ID Namely, it is the virtual LAN identifier. One Ethernet port can support
4K VLAN routes, and one NE can support up to 8K VLAN routes.

VLAN Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of a Bridged
Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLAN Identifier
(VID).

VPN Virtual Private Network. Enables IP service to be transmitted securely

over a public TCP/IP network by encrypting all service from one network
to another.

WTR time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/
connection can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or
to select the normal traffic signal from.

WTR Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet
the restoral threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain
the state during the WTR period unless it is pre-empted by a higher priority
bridge request.

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-5

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

CAR Committed Access Rate

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DDN Digital Data Network

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
 OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
B Acronyms and Abbreviations Configuration Guide

HDLC High Level Data Link Control

ID Identity

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB Loopback

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

NA Not Available

NRZ Non Return to Zero

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 04 (2011-06-30)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Configuration Guide B Acronyms and Abbreviations

SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

VBR Variable Bit Rate

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VPN Virtual Private Network

VB Virtual Bridge

VC Virtual Connection

Issue 04 (2011-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-3

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.